WO2022184852A1 - Conjugated nucleic acids comprising a phosphorodithioate for inhibiting gene expression in a cell - Google Patents

Conjugated nucleic acids comprising a phosphorodithioate for inhibiting gene expression in a cell Download PDF

Info

Publication number
WO2022184852A1
WO2022184852A1 PCT/EP2022/055455 EP2022055455W WO2022184852A1 WO 2022184852 A1 WO2022184852 A1 WO 2022184852A1 EP 2022055455 W EP2022055455 W EP 2022055455W WO 2022184852 A1 WO2022184852 A1 WO 2022184852A1
Authority
WO
WIPO (PCT)
Prior art keywords
nucleic acid
strand
conjugated
nucleotides
nucleotide
Prior art date
Application number
PCT/EP2022/055455
Other languages
French (fr)
Inventor
Adrien WEINGÄRTNER
Lucas Bethge
Eva Marie WIKSTRÖM LINDHOLM
Stefan RATHJEN
Sophie SCHÖLLKOPF
Original Assignee
Silence Therapeutics Gmbh
Priority date (The priority date is an assumption and is not a legal conclusion. Google has not performed a legal analysis and makes no representation as to the accuracy of the date listed.)
Filing date
Publication date
Application filed by Silence Therapeutics Gmbh filed Critical Silence Therapeutics Gmbh
Publication of WO2022184852A1 publication Critical patent/WO2022184852A1/en

Links

Classifications

    • CCHEMISTRY; METALLURGY
    • C12BIOCHEMISTRY; BEER; SPIRITS; WINE; VINEGAR; MICROBIOLOGY; ENZYMOLOGY; MUTATION OR GENETIC ENGINEERING
    • C12NMICROORGANISMS OR ENZYMES; COMPOSITIONS THEREOF; PROPAGATING, PRESERVING, OR MAINTAINING MICROORGANISMS; MUTATION OR GENETIC ENGINEERING; CULTURE MEDIA
    • C12N15/00Mutation or genetic engineering; DNA or RNA concerning genetic engineering, vectors, e.g. plasmids, or their isolation, preparation or purification; Use of hosts therefor
    • C12N15/09Recombinant DNA-technology
    • C12N15/11DNA or RNA fragments; Modified forms thereof; Non-coding nucleic acids having a biological activity
    • C12N15/111General methods applicable to biologically active non-coding nucleic acids
    • AHUMAN NECESSITIES
    • A61MEDICAL OR VETERINARY SCIENCE; HYGIENE
    • A61KPREPARATIONS FOR MEDICAL, DENTAL OR TOILETRY PURPOSES
    • A61K47/00Medicinal preparations characterised by the non-active ingredients used, e.g. carriers or inert additives; Targeting or modifying agents chemically bound to the active ingredient
    • A61K47/50Medicinal preparations characterised by the non-active ingredients used, e.g. carriers or inert additives; Targeting or modifying agents chemically bound to the active ingredient the non-active ingredient being chemically bound to the active ingredient, e.g. polymer-drug conjugates
    • A61K47/51Medicinal preparations characterised by the non-active ingredients used, e.g. carriers or inert additives; Targeting or modifying agents chemically bound to the active ingredient the non-active ingredient being chemically bound to the active ingredient, e.g. polymer-drug conjugates the non-active ingredient being a modifying agent
    • A61K47/54Medicinal preparations characterised by the non-active ingredients used, e.g. carriers or inert additives; Targeting or modifying agents chemically bound to the active ingredient the non-active ingredient being chemically bound to the active ingredient, e.g. polymer-drug conjugates the non-active ingredient being a modifying agent the modifying agent being an organic compound
    • A61K47/549Sugars, nucleosides, nucleotides or nucleic acids
    • AHUMAN NECESSITIES
    • A61MEDICAL OR VETERINARY SCIENCE; HYGIENE
    • A61KPREPARATIONS FOR MEDICAL, DENTAL OR TOILETRY PURPOSES
    • A61K47/00Medicinal preparations characterised by the non-active ingredients used, e.g. carriers or inert additives; Targeting or modifying agents chemically bound to the active ingredient
    • A61K47/50Medicinal preparations characterised by the non-active ingredients used, e.g. carriers or inert additives; Targeting or modifying agents chemically bound to the active ingredient the non-active ingredient being chemically bound to the active ingredient, e.g. polymer-drug conjugates
    • A61K47/51Medicinal preparations characterised by the non-active ingredients used, e.g. carriers or inert additives; Targeting or modifying agents chemically bound to the active ingredient the non-active ingredient being chemically bound to the active ingredient, e.g. polymer-drug conjugates the non-active ingredient being a modifying agent
    • A61K47/56Medicinal preparations characterised by the non-active ingredients used, e.g. carriers or inert additives; Targeting or modifying agents chemically bound to the active ingredient the non-active ingredient being chemically bound to the active ingredient, e.g. polymer-drug conjugates the non-active ingredient being a modifying agent the modifying agent being an organic macromolecular compound, e.g. an oligomeric, polymeric or dendrimeric molecule
    • CCHEMISTRY; METALLURGY
    • C12BIOCHEMISTRY; BEER; SPIRITS; WINE; VINEGAR; MICROBIOLOGY; ENZYMOLOGY; MUTATION OR GENETIC ENGINEERING
    • C12NMICROORGANISMS OR ENZYMES; COMPOSITIONS THEREOF; PROPAGATING, PRESERVING, OR MAINTAINING MICROORGANISMS; MUTATION OR GENETIC ENGINEERING; CULTURE MEDIA
    • C12N2310/00Structure or type of the nucleic acid
    • C12N2310/10Type of nucleic acid
    • C12N2310/14Type of nucleic acid interfering N.A.
    • CCHEMISTRY; METALLURGY
    • C12BIOCHEMISTRY; BEER; SPIRITS; WINE; VINEGAR; MICROBIOLOGY; ENZYMOLOGY; MUTATION OR GENETIC ENGINEERING
    • C12NMICROORGANISMS OR ENZYMES; COMPOSITIONS THEREOF; PROPAGATING, PRESERVING, OR MAINTAINING MICROORGANISMS; MUTATION OR GENETIC ENGINEERING; CULTURE MEDIA
    • C12N2310/00Structure or type of the nucleic acid
    • C12N2310/30Chemical structure
    • C12N2310/31Chemical structure of the backbone
    • C12N2310/313Phosphorodithioates
    • CCHEMISTRY; METALLURGY
    • C12BIOCHEMISTRY; BEER; SPIRITS; WINE; VINEGAR; MICROBIOLOGY; ENZYMOLOGY; MUTATION OR GENETIC ENGINEERING
    • C12NMICROORGANISMS OR ENZYMES; COMPOSITIONS THEREOF; PROPAGATING, PRESERVING, OR MAINTAINING MICROORGANISMS; MUTATION OR GENETIC ENGINEERING; CULTURE MEDIA
    • C12N2310/00Structure or type of the nucleic acid
    • C12N2310/30Chemical structure
    • C12N2310/35Nature of the modification
    • C12N2310/351Conjugate

Definitions

  • Conjugated nucleic acids comprising a phosphorodithioate for inhibiting gene expression in a cell
  • the invention relates to nucleic acids that are conjugated to a ligand, wherein the ligand comprises a phosphorodithioate (PS2) and/or is linked to the nucleic acid via a phosphorodithioate (PS2) linkage.
  • conjugated nucleic acids can be used to inhibit gene expression.
  • the invention further relates to therapeutic uses of such conjugated nucleic acids.
  • Inhibitory nucleic acids such as siRNAs and antisense oligonucleotides (ASOs) are short nucleic acids that inhibit the formation of proteins by causing targeted degradation of the mRNA molecules that encode these proteins.
  • Such gene silencing agents are becoming increasingly important for therapeutic applications in medicine.
  • nucleic acids it is among others necessary that they can be synthesised economically, are metabolically stable, are specifically targeted to a tissue, are able to enter cells and function within acceptable limits of toxicity.
  • the inventors have surprisingly found that at least some of the phosphodiesters (PO) and phosphorothioate (PS) linkages commonly used in inhibitory nucleic acids and/or in ligands attached to such nucleic acids and/or in the linkage between the nucleic acid and the ligand, can safely be replaced by phosphorodithioates (PS2).
  • PO phosphodiesters
  • PS phosphorothioate
  • Such substitutions have the potential to provide nucleic acids with ligands that are as stable as their counterparts with phosphorothioates (PS) in the same positions, but with fewer or no undefined stereocentres. This could lead to drug products that are just as potent, but simpler and/or more economical to synthesise, characterise and/or purify.
  • One aspect of the invention is a conjugated nucleic acid for inhibiting expression of a target gene, wherein the nucleic acid is conjugated to a ligand, wherein:
  • the ligand comprises a phosphorodithioate (PS2); and/or
  • nucleic acid is conjugated to the ligand via a phosphorodithioate (PS2) linkage.
  • PS2 phosphorodithioate
  • composition comprising a plurality of conjugated nucleic acids as disclosed herein, wherein:
  • composition is, or is essentially, stereopure
  • One aspect of the invention is a composition
  • a composition comprising a conjugated nucleic acid as disclosed herein and a solvent and/or a delivery vehicle and/or a physiologically acceptable excipient and/or a carrier and/or a salt and/or a diluent and/or a buffer and/or a preservative and/or a further therapeutic agent selected from the group comprising an oligonucleotide, a small molecule, a monoclonal antibody, a polyclonal antibody and a peptide.
  • One aspect of the invention is a conjugated nucleic acid as disclosed herein or a composition as disclosed herein for use in the prevention, decrease of the risk of suffering from, or treatment of a disease that can be treated by decreasing the expression of the gene targeted by the nucleic acid, as well as for use in associated diagnostic or therapeutic methods.
  • One aspect of the invention is the use of a conjugated nucleic acid as disclosed herein or a composition as disclosed herein in the prevention, decrease of the risk of suffering from, or treatment of a disease that can be treated by decreasing the expression of the gene targeted by the nucleic acid.
  • One aspect of the invention is a method of preventing, decreasing the risk of suffering from, or treating a disease, comprising administering a pharmaceutically effective amount of a conjugated nucleic acid as disclosed herein or a composition as disclosed herein to an individual in need of treatment.
  • One aspect of the invention is a conjugated nucleic acid for inhibiting expression of a target gene, wherein the nucleic acid is conjugated to a ligand, wherein:
  • the ligand comprises a phosphorodithioate (PS2); and/or
  • nucleic acid is conjugated to the ligand via a phosphorodithioate (PS2) linkage.
  • PS2 phosphorodithioate
  • Conjugated nucleic acids and compositions as described herein may have one or several or all of the following advantages over known conjugated nucleic acids or compositions: ease of synthesis, ease of purification, for example because of a higher degree of steric homogeneity in a composition comprising several nucleic acids, or because the molecular weight of the end product is more different to the molecular weight of building blocks or incomplete synthesis products, which may make separation easier, increased thermal stability, higher melting temperature of double-stranded nucleic acids, increased potency of target inhibition in vitro, enhanced stability in vitro , enhanced metabolic stability in vivo, increased potency of target inhibition in vivo, increased duration of action in vivo, increased affinity of the ligand to the target, and/or other advantages related to one or more of the above.
  • the ligand of the conjugated nucleic acid is free of phosphorothioates (PS).
  • the nucleic acid portion of the conjugated nucleic acid comprises at least one strand, wherein said strand is conjugated to the ligand and is free of phosphorothioates (PS).
  • PS phosphorothioates
  • the nucleic acid can be a single-stranded nucleic acid, such as an ASO, or a double-stranded nucleic acid, such as a double-stranded siRNA.
  • the nucleic acid is double-stranded.
  • the nucleic acid can also be one strand of a double-stranded nucleic acid in isolation. It can for example be the second (sense) strand of a double-stranded siRNA.
  • the nucleic acid has at least one strand which comprises a sequence of at least 15, 16, 17, 18, 19, 20, 21, 22, 23, 24 or 25 nucleotides that is at least partially complementary, but preferably fully complementary, to a portion of the mRNA of the target gene the nucleic acid is designed to inhibit.
  • the conjugated nucleic acid comprises at least one phosphorodithioate (PS2) internucleotide linkage.
  • the at least one phosphorodithioate (PS2) internucleotide linkage can be in the nucleic acid strand that is conjugated to the ligand or in a nucleic acid strand that is hybridised to the nucleic acid strand that is conjugated to the ligand.
  • the nucleic acid can comprise more than one phosphorodithioate (PS2) internucleotide linkage. It can comprise two, three, four, five, six, seven, eight, nine or ten phosphorodithioate (PS2) internucleotide linkages.
  • These phosphorodithioate (PS2) internucleotide linkages can all be present in the nucleic acid strand that is conjugated to the ligand and/or in a nucleic acid strand that is hybridised to the nucleic acid conjugated to the ligand and/or distributed between the nucleic acid strand that is conjugated to the ligand and the nucleic acid strand that is hybridised to the nucleic acid strand that is conjugated to the ligand.
  • PS2 phosphorodithioate
  • the conjugated nucleic acid is an siRNA.
  • siRNAs are short interfering or short silencing RNAs that are capable of inhibiting the expression of a target gene through the RNA interference (RNAi) pathway. Inhibition occurs through targeted degradation of mRNA transcripts of the target gene after transcription.
  • RNAi RNA interference
  • the siRNA forms part of the RISC complex.
  • the RISC complex specifically targets the target mRNA by sequence complementarity of the first (antisense) strand with the target sequence.
  • siRNAs can be single- or double-stranded nucleic acids.
  • the siRNA is a double-stranded siRNA.
  • the conjugated nucleic acid comprises a first strand and a second strand.
  • the first strand of the nucleic acid is preferably at least partially complementary to a target sequence.
  • the first strand and the second strand are preferably at least partially complementary to each other. Complementarity should be sufficient for the first strand and the second strand to form a stable duplex under physiological conditions and/or for the first strand and the target sequence to form a stable duplex under physiological conditions.
  • the nucleic acid portion of the conjugated nucleic acid is a double-stranded nucleic acid.
  • the ligand is conjugated to the second strand.
  • the first strand and/or the second strand of the conjugated nucleic acid is/are free of phosphorothioates (PS), i.e. , there are no phosphorothioate (PS) internucleotide linkages present in the first and/or the second strand.
  • PS phosphorothioates
  • a double-stranded nucleic acid is a nucleic acid in which the first strand and the second strand hybridise to each other over at least part of their lengths and are therefore capable of forming a duplex region under physiological conditions, such as in PBS at 37°C at a concentration of 1 mM of each strand.
  • the first and second strand are preferably able to hybridise to each other and therefore to form a duplex region over a region of at least 15 nucleotides, preferably 16, 17, 18 or 19 nucleotides.
  • This duplex region comprises nucleotide base parings between the two strands, preferably based on Watson-Crick base pairing and/or wobble base pairing (such as GU base pairing).
  • nucleotides of the two strands within a duplex region do not have to base pair to each other to form a duplex region. A certain number of mismatches, deletions or insertions between the nucleotide sequences of the two strands are acceptable. Overhangs on either end of the first or second strand or unpaired nucleotides at either end of the double- stranded nucleic acid are also possible.
  • the double-stranded nucleic acid is preferably a stable double-stranded nucleic acid under physiological conditions, and preferably has a melting temperature (Tm) of 45°C or more, 50°C or more, 55°C or more, 60°C or more, 65°C or more, 70°C or more, 75°C or more, 80°C or more, or 85°C or more, for example in PBS at a concentration of 1 mM of each strand.
  • Tm melting temperature
  • the first strand and the second strand are preferably capable of forming a duplex region (i.e., are complementary to each other) over i) at least a portion of their lengths, preferably over at least 15 nucleotides of both of their lengths, ii) over the entire length of the first strand, iii) over the entire length of the second strand or iv) over the entire length of both the first and the second strand.
  • Strands being complementary to each other over a certain length means that the strands are able to base pair to each other, either via Watson-Crick or wobble base pairing, over that length.
  • Each nucleotide of the length does not necessarily have to be able to base pair with its counterpart in the other strand over the entire given length as long as a stable double-stranded nucleotide under physiological conditions can be formed. It is however preferred, in certain embodiments, if each nucleotide of the length can base pair with its counterpart in the other strand over the entire given length.
  • a certain number of mismatches, deletions or insertions between the first strand and the target sequence, or between the first strand and the second strand can be tolerated in the context of the double-stranded siRNA and even have the potential in certain cases to increase RNA interference (e.g., inhibition) activity.
  • the inhibition activity of the conjugated nucleic acids according to the present invention relies on the formation of a duplex region between all or a portion of the first strand and a portion of a target nucleic acid.
  • the portion of the target nucleic acid that forms a duplex region with the first strand defined as beginning with the first base pair formed between the first strand and the target sequence and ending with the last base pair formed between the first strand and the target sequence, inclusive, is the target nucleic acid sequence or simply, target sequence.
  • the duplex region formed between the first strand and the second strand need not be the same as the duplex region formed between the first strand and the target sequence. That is, the second strand may have a sequence different from the target sequence; however, the first strand must be able to form a duplex structure with both the second strand and the target sequence, at least under physiological conditions.
  • Nucleic acids that are capable of hybridising under physiological conditions are nucleic acids that are capable of forming base pairs, preferably Watson-Crick or wobble base-pairs, between at least a portion of the opposed nucleotides in the strands so as to form at least a duplex region.
  • Such a double-stranded nucleic acid is preferably a stable double-stranded nucleic acid under physiological conditions (for example in PBS at 37°C at a concentration of 1 mM of each strand), meaning that under such conditions, the two strands stay hybridised to each other.
  • the Tm of the double-stranded nucleotide is preferably 45°C or more, 50°C or more, 55°C or more, 60°C or more, 65°C or more, 70°C or more, 75°C or more, 80°C or more, or 85°C or more, for example in PBS at a concentration of 1 mM of each strand.
  • the complementarity between the first strand and the target sequence may be perfect (i.e. , 100% identity with no nucleotide mismatches or insertions or deletions in the first strand as compared to the target sequence).
  • the complementarity between the first strand and the target sequence may not be perfect.
  • the complementarity may be from about 70% to about 100%. More specifically, the complementarity may be at least 70%, 80%, 85%, 90% or 95% and intermediate values.
  • the identity between the first strand and the complementary sequence of the target sequence may range from about 75% to about 100%. More specifically, the complementarity may be at least 75%, 80%, 85%, 90% or 95% and intermediate values, provided a nucleic acid is capable of reducing or inhibiting the expression of the target gene.
  • a nucleic acid having less than 100% complementarity between the first strand and the target sequence may be able to reduce the expression of the target gene to the same level as a nucleic acid having perfect complementarity between the first strand and target sequence.
  • it may be able to reduce expression of the expression of the target gene to a level that is 15%, 20%, 25%, 30%, 35%, 40%, 45%, 50%, 55%, 60%, 65%, 70%, 75%, 80%, 85%, 90%, 95%, 98%, 99% or 100% of the level of reduction achieved by the nucleic acid with perfect complementarity.
  • the conjugated nucleic acid is capable of inhibiting the target gene.
  • the inhibition is preferably mediated by the RNA interference (RNAi) mechanism.
  • the nucleic acid mediates RNA interference (i.e., it is capable of inhibiting its target) with an efficacy of at least 50% inhibition, more preferably at least 70%, more preferably at least 80%, even more preferably at least 90%, yet more preferably at least 95% and most preferably 100% inhibition.
  • the inhibition efficacy is preferably measured by comparing the target mRNA level in cells, such as hepatocytes, treated with a target-specific siRNA to the target-mRNA level in cells treated with a control in a comparable experiment.
  • the control can be a treatment with a siRNA that has a different target or without a siRNA.
  • the nucleic acid, or at least the first strand of the nucleic acid is therefore preferably able to be incorporated into the RISC complex.
  • the nucleic acid, or at least the first strand of the nucleic acid is therefore able to guide the RISC complex to a specific target RNA with which the nucleic acid, or at least the first strand of the nucleic acid, is at least partially complementary.
  • the RISC complex then specifically cleaves this target RNA and as a result leads to inhibition of the expression of the gene from which the RNA stems.
  • the target gene of the conjugated nucleic acid is a gene other than one, several or all of the following: Complement C3 (complement component C3), XDH (Xanthine Dehydrogenase), PROS1 (Protein S) and/or CNNM4 (Cyclin And CBS Domain Divalent Metal Cation Transport Mediator 4).
  • Complement C3 complement component C3
  • XDH Xanthine Dehydrogenase
  • PROS1 Protein S
  • CNNM4 Cyclin And CBS Domain Divalent Metal Cation Transport Mediator 4
  • nucleotide sequence in which one, several, such as two, three, four, five, six, seven or more, including all, nucleotides are modified by modifications such as 2’- OMe, 2’-F, are linked to a ligand or a linker, have a 3’ end or 5’ end modification or any other modification. It also encompasses sequences in which two or more nucleotides are linked to each other by the natural phosphodiester linkage or by any other linkage such as a phosphorothioate or a phosphorodithioate linkage.
  • the 5’-most nucleotide of the first strand of a nucleic acid is a nucleotide other than A or U
  • this nucleotide is replaced by an A or U.
  • this nucleotide is replaced by U, and more preferably by U with a 5’ (E)-vinylphosphonate, in the sequence.
  • the first nucleotide at the 5’ end of the first strand there is a mismatch between the first nucleotide at the 5’ end of the first strand and the corresponding nucleotide (the nucleotide with which it would form a base pair if there was no mismatch) in the second strand.
  • the 5’ nucleotide of the first strand may be U and the corresponding nucleotide in the second strand may be any nucleotide other than A.
  • the two nucleotides are unable to form a classical Watson-Crick base pair and there is a mismatch between the two nucleotides.
  • the conjugated nucleic acids described herein may be capable of inhibiting the expression of a target gene, preferably in a cell.
  • the conjugated nucleic acids may be capable of inhibiting the target gene expression completely, resulting in 0% remaining expression upon treatment with the nucleic acids.
  • the conjugated nucleic acids may be capable of partially inhibiting the target gene expression. Partial inhibition means that the target gene expression is decreased by 15%, 20%, 30%, 40%, 50%, 60%, 70%, 75%, 80%, 85%, 90%, 95% or more, or intermediate values, as compared to the absence of the conjugated nucleic acids under comparable conditions.
  • the level of inhibition may be measured by comparing a treated sample with an untreated sample or with a sample treated with a control, such as for example a siRNA that does not target the target gene because it has a sequence that does not hybridise with the target gene mRNA. Inhibition may be measured by measuring the target gene mRNA and/or protein levels or levels of a biomarker or indicator that correlates with target gene product presence or activity. It may be measured in cells that may have been treated in vitro with a conjugated nucleic acid described herein.
  • inhibition may be measured in cells, such as hepatocytes, or tissue, such as liver tissue, or an organ, such as the liver, or in a body fluid such as blood, serum, lymph or in any other body part or fluid that has been taken from a subject previously treated with a nucleic acid disclosed herein.
  • inhibition of the target gene expression is determined by comparing the target gene mRNA level measured in target gene -expressing cells after 24 or 48 hours in vitro treatment with a conjugated nucleic acid disclosed herein under ideal conditions (see the examples for appropriate concentrations and conditions) to the target gene mRNA level measured in control cells that were untreated or mock treated or treated with a control conjugated nucleic acid under the same or at least comparable conditions.
  • One aspect of the present invention relates to a conjugated nucleic acid, wherein the first strand and the second strand are present on a single strand of a nucleic acid that loops around so that the first strand and the second strand are able to hybridise to each other and to thereby form a double-stranded nucleic acid with a duplex region.
  • the first strand and the second strand of the conjugated nucleic acid are separate strands.
  • the two separate strands are preferably each 17-25 nucleotides in length, more preferably 18-25 nucleotides in length.
  • the two strands may be of the same or different lengths.
  • the first strand may be 17-25 nucleotides in length, preferably it may be 18-24 nucleotides in length, it may be 18, 19, 20, 21, 22, 23 or 24 nucleotides in length. Most preferably, the first strand is 19 nucleotides in length.
  • the second strand may independently be 17-25 nucleotides in length, preferably it may be 18-24 nucleotides in length, it may be 18, 19, 20, 21 , 22, 23 or 24 nucleotides in length. More preferably, the second strand is 18 or 19 or 20 nucleotides in length, and most preferably it is 19 nucleotides in length.
  • the first strand and the second strand of the conjugated nucleic acid form a duplex region of 17-25 nucleotides in length. More preferably, the duplex region is 18-24 nucleotides in length. The duplex region may be 17, 18, 19, 20, 21 , 22, 23, 24 or 25 nucleotides in length. In the most preferably embodiment, the duplex region is 18 or 19 nucleotides in length.
  • the duplex region is defined here as the region between and including the 5’-most nucleotide of the first strand that is base paired to a nucleotide of the second strand to the 3’-most nucleotide of the first strand that is base paired to a nucleotide of the second strand.
  • the duplex region may comprise nucleotides in either or both strands that are not base-paired to a nucleotide in the other strand. It may comprise one, two, three or four such nucleotides on the first strand and/or on the second strand. However, preferably, the duplex region consists of 17-25 consecutive nucleotide base pairs. That is to say that it preferably comprises 17-25 consecutive nucleotides on both of the strands that all base pair to a nucleotide in the other strand. More preferably, the duplex region consists of 18 or 19 consecutive nucleotide base pairs, most preferably 18.
  • the nucleic acid portion of a conjugated nucleic acid comprising a first strand and a second strand may have an overhang at one end and a blunt end at the other end.
  • the nucleic acid may have an overhang at both ends.
  • the nucleic acid may be blunt ended at both ends.
  • the nucleic acid may be blunt ended at the end with the 5' end of the first strand and the 3' end of the second strand or at the 3’ end of the first strand and the 5' end of the second strand.
  • the nucleic acid portion of the conjugated nucleic acid may comprise an overhang at a 3' or 5' end.
  • the nucleic acid may have a 3' overhang on the first strand.
  • the nucleic acid may have a 3' overhang on the second strand.
  • the nucleic acid may have a 5' overhang on the first strand.
  • the nucleic acid may have a 5' overhang on the second strand.
  • the nucleic acid may have an overhang at both the 5' end and 3' end of the first strand.
  • the nucleic acid may have an overhang at both the 5' end and 3' end of the second strand.
  • the nucleic acid may have a 5' overhang on the first strand and a 3' overhang on the second strand.
  • the nucleic acid may have a 3' overhang on the first strand and a 5' overhang on the second strand.
  • the nucleic acid may have a 3' overhang on the first strand and a 3' overhang on the second strand.
  • the nucleic acid may have a 5' overhang on the first strand and a 5' overhang on the second strand.
  • An overhang at the 3’ end or 5’ end of the second strand or the first strand may consist of 1, 2, 3, 4 and 5 nucleotides in length.
  • an overhang may consist of 1 or 2 nucleotides, which may or may not be modified.
  • the 5’ end of the first strand is a single-stranded overhang of one, two or three nucleotides, preferably of one nucleotide.
  • the conjugated nucleic acids discussed herein include unmodified RNA as well as RNA which has been modified, e.g., to improve efficacy or stability.
  • Unmodified RNA refers to a molecule in which the components of the nucleic acid, namely sugars, bases, and phosphate moieties, are the same or essentially the same as those which occur in nature, for example as occur naturally in the human body.
  • modified nucleotide refers to a nucleotide in which one or more of the components of the nucleotide, namely the sugar, base, and phosphate moiety, is/are different from those which occur in nature.
  • modified nucleotide also refers in certain cases to molecules that are not nucleotides in the strict sense of the term because they lack, or have a substitute of, an essential component of a nucleotide, such as the sugar, base or phosphate moiety.
  • a nucleic acid comprising such modified nucleotides is still to be understood as being a nucleic acid, even if one or more of the nucleotides of the nucleic acid has been replaced by a modified nucleotide that lacks, or has a substitution of, an essential component of a nucleotide.
  • Modifications of the nucleic acid of the present invention generally provide a powerful tool in overcoming potential limitations including, but not limited to, in vitro and in vivo stability and bioavailability inherent to native RNA molecules.
  • the nucleic acids according to the invention may be modified by chemical modifications. Modified nucleic acids can also minimise the possibility of inducing interferon activity in humans. Modifications can further enhance the functional delivery of a nucleic acid to a target cell.
  • the modified nucleic acids of the present invention may comprise one or more chemically modified ribonucleotides of either or both of the first strand or the second strand, when they have a first and second strand.
  • a ribonucleotide may comprise a chemical modification of the base, sugar or phosphate moieties.
  • the ribonucleic acid may be modified by substitution with or insertion of analogues of nucleic acids or bases.
  • “same or common modification” means the same modification to any nucleotide, be that A, G, C or U modified with a group such as a methyl group (2’-OMe) or a fluoro group (2’-F).
  • 2 ' -F-dU, 2 ' -F-dA, 2 ' -F-dC, 2 ' -F-dG are all considered to be the same or common modification, as are 2'-OMe-rU, 2'-OMe-rA; 2'-OMe- rC; 2'-OMe-rG.
  • a 2’-F modification is a different modification compared to a 2’-OMe modification.
  • At least one nucleotide of the conjugated nucleic acid is a modified nucleotide, preferably a non-naturally occurring nucleotide such as preferably a 2’-F modified nucleotide.
  • at least one nucleotide of the first and/or second strand of the conjugated nucleic acid is a modified nucleotide, preferably a non-naturally occurring nucleotide such as preferably a 2’-F modified nucleotide.
  • a modified nucleotide can be a nucleotide with a modification of the sugar group.
  • the 2' hydroxyl group (OH) can be modified or replaced with a number of different “oxy” or “deoxy” substituents.
  • Other substituents of certain embodiments include
  • the sugar group can also contain one or more carbons that possess the opposite stereochemical configuration than that of the corresponding carbon in ribose.
  • a modified nucleotide may contain a sugar such as arabinose.
  • Modified nucleotides can also include “abasic” sugars, which lack a nucleobase at C - T. These abasic sugars can further contain modifications at one or more of the constituent sugar atoms.
  • the 2' modifications may be used in combination with one or more phosphate internucleotide linker modifications (e.g., phosphorothioate or phosphorodithioate).
  • One or more nucleotides of a conjugated nucleic acid of the present invention may be modified.
  • the nucleic acid may comprise at least one modified nucleotide.
  • the modified nucleotide may be in the first strand.
  • the modified nucleotide may be in the second strand.
  • the modified nucleotide may be in the duplex region.
  • the modified nucleotide may be outside the duplex region, i.e., in a single-stranded region.
  • the modified nucleotide may be on the first strand and may be outside the duplex region.
  • the modified nucleotide may be on the second strand and may be outside the duplex region.
  • the 3’-terminal nucleotide of the first strand may be a modified nucleotide.
  • the 3’-terminal nucleotide of the second strand may be a modified nucleotide.
  • the 5’-terminal nucleotide of the first strand may be a modified nucleotide.
  • the 5’- terminal nucleotide of the second strand may be a modified nucleotide.
  • a conjugated nucleic acid of the invention may have 1 modified nucleotide or a nucleic acid of the invention may have about 2-4 modified nucleotides, or a nucleic acid may have about 4-6 modified nucleotides, about 6-8 modified nucleotides, about 8-10 modified nucleotides, about 10-12 modified nucleotides, about 12-14 modified nucleotides, about 14-16 modified nucleotides about 16-18 modified nucleotides, about 18-20 modified nucleotides, about 20-22 modified nucleotides, about 22-24 modified nucleotides, about 24-26 modified nucleotides or about 26-28 modified nucleotides. All nucleotides of the nucleic acids may be modified nucleotides.
  • nucleic acid comprising said modified nucleotides retains at least 50% of its activity as compared to the same nucleic acid but without said modified nucleotides or vice versa.
  • the nucleic acid may retain 55%, 60%, 65%, 70%, 75%, 80%, 85%, 90%, 95% or 100% and intermediate values of its activity as compared to the same nucleic acid but without said modified nucleotides, or may have more than 100% of the activity of the same nucleic acid without said modified nucleotides.
  • the modified nucleotide may be a purine or a pyrimidine. At least half of the purines may be modified. At least half of the pyrimidines may be modified. All of the purines may be modified. All of the pyrimidines may be modified.
  • the modified nucleotides may be selected from the group consisting of a 3' terminal deoxy thymine (dT) nucleotide, a 2'-0-methyl (2’-OMe) modified nucleotide, a 2’ modified nucleotide, a 2' deoxy modified nucleotide, a locked nucleotide, an abasic nucleotide, a 2' amino modified nucleotide, a 2' alkyl modified nucleotide, a 2’-deoxy-2’-fluoro (2’-F) modified nucleotide, a morpholino nucleotide, a phosphoramidate, a non-natural base comprising nucleotide, a nucleotide comprising a 5'-phosphorothioate group, a nucleotide comprising a 5' phosphate or 5' phosphate mimic and a terminal nucleotide linked to a cholesteryl derivative or a dode
  • the conjugated nucleic acid may comprise a nucleotide comprising a modified base, wherein the base is selected from 2-aminoadenosine, 2,6-diaminopurine,inosine, pyridin-4-one, pyridin-2-one, phenyl, pseudouracil, 2, 4, 6-trimethoxy benzene, 3-methyl uracil, dihydrouridine, naphthyl, aminophenyl, 5-alkylcytidine (e.g., 5-methylcytidine), 5-alkyluridine (e.g., ribothymidine), 5-halouridine (e.g., 5-bromouridine), 6-azapyrimidine, 6-alkylpyrimidine (e.g.
  • 6-methyluridine 6-methyluridine
  • propyne quesosine, 2-thiouridine, 4-thiouridine, wybutosine, wybutoxosine, 4-acetylcytidine, 5-(carboxyhydroxymethyl)uridine, 5'- carboxymethylaminomethyl-2-thiouridine, 5-carboxymethylaminomethyluridine, beta-D- galactosylqueosine, 1-methyladenosine, 1-methylinosine, 2,2-dimethylguanosine, 3- methylcytidine, 2-methyladenosine, 2-methylguanosine, N6-methyladenosine, 7- methylguanosine, 5-methoxyaminomethyl-2-thiouridine, 5-methylaminomethyluridine, 5- methylcarbonylmethyluridine, 5-methyloxyuridine, 5-methyl-2-thiouridine, 2-methylthio-N6- isopentenyladenosine, beta-D-mannosylqueosine
  • modifications described herein and that occur within a nucleic acid will be repeated within a polynucleotide molecule, such as a modification of a base, or a phosphate moiety, or a non-linking O of a phosphate moiety. In some cases, the modification will occur at all of the possible positions/nucleotides in the polynucleotide but in many cases it will not.
  • a modification may only occur at a 3' or 5' terminal position, may only occur in a terminal region, such as at a position on a terminal nucleotide or in the last 2, 3, 4, 5, or 10 nucleotides of a strand.
  • a modification may occur in a double-strand region, a single-strand region, or in both.
  • a modification may occur only in the double-strand region of a nucleic acid of the invention or may only occur in a single-strand region of a nucleic acid of the invention.
  • a phosphorothioate or phosphorodithioate modification at a non-linking O position may only occur at one or both termini, may only occur in a terminal region, e.g., at a position on a terminal nucleotide or in the last 2, 3, 4 or 5 nucleotides of a strand, or may occur in duplex and/or in single-strand regions, preferably at termini.
  • the 5' end and/or 3’ end may be phosphorylated.
  • Stability of a conjugated nucleic acid of the invention may be increased by including particular bases in overhangs, or by including modified nucleotides, in single-strand overhangs, e.g., in a 5' or 3' overhang, or in both.
  • Purine nucleotides may be included in overhangs. All or some of the bases in a 3' or 5' overhang may be modified. Modifications can include the use of modifications at the 2' OH group of the ribose sugar, the use of deoxyribonucleotides, instead of ribonucleotides, and modifications in the phosphate group, such as phosphorothioate or phosphorodithioate modifications. Overhangs need not be homologous with the target sequence. Nucleases can hydrolyse nucleic acid phosphodiester (PO) bonds. However, chemical modifications to nucleic acids can confer improved properties, and, can render oligoribonucleotides more stable to nucleases.
  • PO
  • Conjugated nucleic acids can include one or more of:
  • modification of the 3' end or 5' end of the first strand and/or the second strand e.g., removal, modification or replacement of a terminal phosphate group or conjugation of a moiety, e.g., a fluorescently labelled moiety, to either the 3' or 5' end of one or both strands.
  • the conjugated nucleic acid may comprise one or more nucleotides on the second and/or first strand that are modified. Alternating nucleotides may be modified, to form modified nucleotides.
  • Alternating as described herein means to occur one after another in a regular way. In other words, alternating means to occur in turn repeatedly. For example, if one nucleotide is modified, the next contiguous nucleotide is not modified and the following contiguous nucleotide is modified and so on. One nucleotide may be modified with a first modification, the next contiguous nucleotide may be modified with a second modification and the following contiguous nucleotide is modified with the first modification and so on, where the first and second modifications are different.
  • nucleic acid sequences of the present invention are shown in the examples. These examples are meant to be representative and not limiting.
  • at least nucleotides 2 and 14 of the first strand are modified, preferably by a first common modification, the nucleotides being numbered consecutively starting with nucleotide number 1 at the 5’ end of the first strand.
  • the first modification is preferably 2’-F.
  • At least one, several or preferably all the even-numbered nucleotides of the first strand are modified, preferably by a first common modification, the nucleotides being numbered consecutively starting with nucleotide number 1 at the 5’ end of the first strand.
  • the first modification is preferably 2’-F.
  • At least one, several or preferably all the odd-numbered nucleotides of the first strand are modified, the nucleotides being numbered consecutively starting with nucleotide number 1 at the 5’ end of the first strand.
  • they are modified by a second modification. This second modification is preferably different from the first modification if the nucleic acid also comprises a first modification, for example of nucleotides 2 and 14 or of all the even-numbered nucleotides of the first strand.
  • the first modification is preferably any 2’ ribose modification that is of the same size or smaller in volume than a 2’-OH group, or a locked nucleic acid (LNA), or an unlocked nucleic acid (UNA), or a 2'-Fluoroarabino Nucleic Acid (FANA) modification.
  • a 2’ ribose modification that is of the same size or smaller in volume than a 2’-OH group can for example be a 2’-F, 2’-H, 2’-halo, or 2 -NH2.
  • the second modification is preferably any 2’ ribose modification that is larger in volume than a 2’-OH group.
  • a 2’ ribose modification that is larger in volume than a 2’-OH group can for example be a 2’-OMe, 2’-0- MOE (2’-0-methoxyethyl), 2’-0-allyl or 2’-0-alkyl, with the proviso that the nucleic is capable of reducing the expression of the target gene to at least the same extent as the same nucleic acid without the modification(s) under comparable conditions.
  • the first modification is preferably 2’-F and/or the second modification is preferably 2’-OMe.
  • the size or volume of a substituent is preferably measured as the van der Waals volume.
  • At least one, several or preferably all the nucleotides of the second strand in a position corresponding to an even-numbered nucleotide of the first strand are modified, preferably by a third modification.
  • a third modification Preferably in the same nucleic acid nucleotides 2 and 14 or all the even numbered nucleotides of the first strand are modified with a first modification.
  • the odd-numbered nucleotides of the first strand are modified with a second modification.
  • the third modification is different from the first modification and/or the third modification is the same as the second modification.
  • the first modification is preferably any 2’ ribose modification that is of the same size or smaller in volume than a 2’-OH group, or a locked nucleic acid (LNA), or an unlocked nucleic acid (UNA), or a 2'-Fluoroarabino Nucleic Acid (FANA) modification.
  • a 2’ ribose modification that is of the same size or smaller in volume than a 2’-OH group can for example be a 2’-F, 2’-H, 2’-halo, or 2’-NH 2 .
  • the second and/or third modification is preferably any 2’ ribose modification that is larger in volume than a 2’-OH group.
  • a 2’ ribose modification that is larger in volume than a 2’-OH group can for example be a 2’-OMe, 2’-0-MOE (2’-0-methoxyethyl), 2’-0-allyl or 2’-0-alkyl, with the proviso that the nucleic is capable of reducing the expression of the target gene to at least the same extent as the same nucleic acid without the modification(s) under comparable conditions.
  • the first modification is preferably 2’-F and/or the second and/or third modification is/are preferably 2’-OMe.
  • the nucleotides on the first strand are numbered consecutively starting with nucleotide number 1 at the 5’ end of the first strand.
  • a nucleotide of the second strand that is in a position corresponding, for example, to an even- numbered nucleotide of the first strand is a nucleotide of the second strand that is base-paired to an even-numbered nucleotide of the first strand.
  • At least one, several or preferably all the nucleotides of the second strand in a position corresponding to an odd-numbered nucleotide of the first strand are modified, preferably by a fourth modification.
  • Preferably in the same nucleic acid nucleotides 2 and 14 or all the even numbered nucleotides of the first strand are modified with a first modification.
  • the odd-numbered nucleotides of the first strand are modified with a second modification.
  • all the nucleotides of the second strand in a position corresponding to an even-numbered nucleotide of the first strand are modified with a third modification.
  • the fourth modification is preferably different from the second modification and preferably different from the third modification and the fourth modification is preferably the same as the first modification.
  • the first and/or fourth modification is preferably any 2’ ribose modification that is of the same size or smaller in volume than a 2’-OH group, or a locked nucleic acid (LNA), or an unlocked nucleic acid (UNA), or a 2'-Fluoroarabino Nucleic Acid (FANA) modification.
  • a 2’ ribose modification that is of the same size or smaller in volume than a 2’-OH group can for example be a 2’-F, 2’-H, 2’-halo, or 2’-NH 2 .
  • the second and/or third modification is preferably any 2’ ribose modification that is larger in volume than a 2’-OH group.
  • a 2’ ribose modification that is larger in volume than a 2’-OH group can for example be a 2’- OMe, 2’-0-MOE (2’-0-methoxyethyl), 2’-0-allyl or 2’-0-alkyl, with the proviso that the nucleic is capable of reducing the expression of the target gene to at least the same extent as the same nucleic acid without the modification(s) under comparable conditions.
  • the first and/or the fourth modification is/are preferably a 2’-OMe modification and/or the second and/or third modification is/are preferably a 2’-F modification.
  • the nucleotides on the first strand are numbered consecutively starting with nucleotide number 1 at the 5’ end of the first strand.
  • nucleotide/nucleotides of the second strand in a position corresponding to nucleotide 11 or nucleotide 13 or nucleotides 11 and 13 or nucleotides 11-
  • nucleotides of the second strand are/are modified by a fourth modification.
  • all the nucleotides of the second strand other than the nucleotide/nucleotides in a position corresponding to nucleotide 11 or nucleotide 13 or nucleotides 11 and 13 or nucleotides 11-13 of the first strand is/are modified by a third modification.
  • the fourth modification is preferably different from the second modification and preferably different from the third modification and the fourth modification is preferably the same as the first modification.
  • the first and/or fourth modification is preferably any 2’ ribose modification that is of the same size or smaller in volume than a 2’-OH group, or a locked nucleic acid (LNA), or an unlocked nucleic acid (UNA), or a 2'-Fluoroarabino Nucleic Acid (FANA) modification.
  • a 2’ ribose modification that is of the same size or smaller in volume than a 2’-OH group can for example be a 2’-F, 2’-H, 2’-halo, or 2’-NH 2 .
  • the second and/or third modification is preferably any 2’ ribose modification that is larger in volume than a 2’-OH group.
  • a 2’ ribose modification that is larger in volume than a 2’-OH group can for example be a 2’- OMe, 2’-0-MOE (2’-0-methoxyethyl), 2’-0-allyl or 2’-0-alkyl, with the proviso that the nucleic is capable of reducing the expression of the target gene to at least the same extent as the same nucleic acid without the modification(s) under comparable conditions.
  • the first and/or the fourth modification is/are preferably a 2’-OMe modification and/or the second and/or third modification is/are preferably a 2’-F modification.
  • the nucleotides on the first strand are numbered consecutively starting with nucleotide number 1 at the 5’ end of the first strand.
  • all the even-numbered nucleotides of the first strand are modified by a first modification
  • all the odd-numbered nucleotides of the first strand are modified by a second modification
  • all the nucleotides of the second strand in a position corresponding to an even-numbered nucleotide of the first strand are modified by a third modification
  • all the nucleotides of the second strand in a position corresponding to an odd- numbered nucleotide of the first strand are modified by a fourth modification, wherein the first and/or fourth modification is/are 2’-F and/or the second and/or third modification is/are 2’-OMe.
  • all the even-numbered nucleotides of the first strand are modified by a first modification
  • all the odd-numbered nucleotides of the first strand are modified by a second modification
  • all the nucleotides of the second strand in positions corresponding to nucleotides 11-13 of the first strand are modified by a fourth modification
  • all the nucleotides of the second strand other than the nucleotides corresponding to nucleotides 11-13 of the first strand are modified by a third modification, wherein the first and fourth modification are 2’-F and the second and third modification are 2’-OMe.
  • the 3’ terminal nucleotide of the second strand is an inverted RNA nucleotide (i.e. , the nucleotide is linked to the 3’ end of the strand through its 3’ carbon, rather than through its 5’ carbon as would normally be the case).
  • the inverted RNA nucleotide is preferably an unmodified nucleotide in the sense that it does not comprise any modifications compared to the natural nucleotide counterpart.
  • the inverted RNA nucleotide is preferably a 2’-OH nucleotide.
  • the nucleic acid is blunt-ended at least at the end that comprises the 5’ end of the first strand.
  • One aspect of the present invention is a conjugated nucleic acid as disclosed herein for inhibiting expression of a target gene, preferably in a cell, wherein the nucleic acid comprises a first strand and a second strand and wherein said first strand includes modified nucleotides or unmodified nucleotides at a plurality of positions in order to facilitate processing of the nucleic acid by RISC.
  • “facilitate processing by RISC” means that the nucleic acid can be processed by RISC, for example any modification present will permit the nucleic acid to be processed by RISC and preferably, will be beneficial to processing by RISC, suitably such that siRNA activity can take place.
  • One aspect is a conjugated nucleic acid as disclosed herein, wherein the nucleotides at positions 2 and 14 from the 5’ end of the first strand are not modified with a 2’-OMe modification, and the nucleotide/nucleotides on the second strand which corresponds to position 11 or position 13 or positions 11 and 13 or positions 11, 12 and 13 of the first strand is/are not modified with a 2’-OMe modification (in other words, they are naturally occurring nucleotides or are modified with a modification other than 2’-OMe).
  • the nucleotide on the second strand which corresponds to position 13 of the first strand is the nucleotide that forms a base pair with position 13 (from the 5’ end) of the first strand. In one aspect, the nucleotide on the second strand which corresponds to position 11 of the first strand is the nucleotide that forms a base pair with position 11 (from the 5’ end) of the first strand.
  • the nucleotide on the second strand which corresponds to position 12 of the first strand is the nucleotide that forms a base pair with position 12 (from the 5’ end) of the first strand.
  • position 13 (from the 5’ end) of the first strand would pair with position 7 (from the 5’ end) of the second strand.
  • Position 11 (from the 5’ end) of the first strand would pair with position 9 (from the 5’ end) of the second strand.
  • This nomenclature may be applied to other positions of the second strand.
  • the nucleotide on the second strand that “corresponds to” a position on the first strand may not necessarily form a base pair if that position is the position in which there is a mismatch, but the principle of the nomenclature still applies.
  • One aspect is a conjugated nucleic acid as disclosed herein, wherein the nucleotides at positions 2 and 14 from the 5’ end of the first strand are not modified with a 2’-OMe modification, and the nucleotides on the second strand which correspond to position 11, or 13, or 11 and 13, or 11-13 of the first strand are modified with a 2'-F modification.
  • One aspect is a conjugated nucleic acid as disclosed herein, wherein the nucleotides at positions 2 and 14 from the 5’ end of the first strand are modified with a 2'-F modification, and the nucleotides on the second strand which correspond to position 11, or 13, or 11 and 13, or 11-13 of the first strand are not modified with a 2’-OMe modification.
  • One aspect is a conjugated nucleic acid as disclosed herein, wherein the nucleotides at positions 2 and 14 from the 5’ end of the first strand are modified with a 2'-F modification, and the nucleotides on the second strand which correspond to position 11, or 13, or 11 and 13, or 11-13 of the first strand are modified with a 2'-F modification.
  • One aspect is a conjugated nucleic acid as disclosed herein wherein greater than 50% of the nucleotides of the first and/or second strand comprise a 2’-OMe modification, such as greater than 55%, 60%, 65%, 70%, 75%, 80%, or 85%, or more, of the first and/or second strand comprise a 2’-OMe modification.
  • One aspect is a conjugated nucleic acid as disclosed herein wherein greater than 50% of the nucleotides of the first and/or second strand comprise a naturally occurring RNA modification, such as wherein greater than 55%, 60%, 65%, 70%, 75%, 80%, or 85% or more of the first and/or second strands comprise such a modification.
  • Suitable naturally occurring modifications include, as well as 2’-OMe, other 2’ sugar modifications, in particular a 2’-H modification resulting in a DNA nucleotide.
  • One aspect is a conjugated nucleic acid as disclosed herein comprising no more than 20%, such as no more than 15% such as no more than 10%, of nucleotides which have 2' modifications that are not 2’-OMe modifications on the first and/or second strand.
  • One aspect is a conjugated nucleic acid as disclosed herein, wherein the number of nucleotides in the first and/or second strand with a 2’-modification that is not a 2’-OMe modification is no more than 7, more preferably no more than 5, and most preferably no more than 3.
  • One aspect is a conjugated nucleic acid as disclosed herein comprising no more than 20%, (such as no more than 15% or no more than 10%) of 2’-F modifications on the first and/or second strand.
  • One aspect is a conjugated nucleic acid as disclosed herein, wherein the number of nucleotides in the first and/or second strand with a 2’-F modification is no more than 7, more preferably no more than 5, and most preferably no more than 3.
  • One aspect is a conjugated nucleic acid as disclosed herein, wherein all nucleotides are modified with a 2’-OMe modification except positions 2 and 14 from the 5’ end of the first strand and the nucleotides on the second strand which correspond to position 11 , or 13, or 11 and 13, or 11-13 of the first strand.
  • the nucleotides that are not modified with 2’-OMe are modified with fluoro at the 2’ position (2’-F modification).
  • nucleotides of the conjugated nucleic acid are modified at the 2’ position of the sugar.
  • these nucleotides are modified with a 2’-F modification where the modification is not a 2’-OMe modification.
  • nucleic acid of the conjugated nucleic acid is modified on the first strand with alternating 2’-OMe modifications and 2-F modifications, and positions 2 and 14 (starting from the 5’ end) are modified with 2’-F.
  • the second strand is modified with 2’-F modifications at nucleotides on the second strand which correspond to position 11, or 13, or 11 and 13, or 11-13 of the first strand.
  • the second strand is modified with 2’-F modifications at positions 11-13 counting from the 3’ end starting at the first position of the complementary (double-stranded) region, and the remaining modifications are naturally occurring modifications, preferably 2’-OMe.
  • the complementary region at least in this case starts at the first position of the second strand that has a corresponding nucleotide in the first strand, regardless of whether the two nucleotides are able to base pair to each other.
  • each of the nucleotides of the first strand and of the second strand is a modified nucleotide.
  • nucleotides of the first strand are numbered contiguously starting with nucleotide number 1 at the 5’ end of the first strand.
  • Nucleotides of the second strand are numbered contiguously starting with nucleotide number 1 at the 3’ end of the second strand.
  • An “odd numbered” nucleotide is a nucleotide numbered with an odd number in a strand in which the nucleotides are numbered contiguously starting either from the indicated end or from the 5’ end of the strand if the end from which the nucleotides are numbered is not indicated.
  • An “even numbered” nucleotide is a nucleotide numbered with an even number in a strand in which the nucleotides are numbered contiguously starting either from the indicated end or from the 5’ end of the strand if the end from which the nucleotides are numbered is not indicated.
  • One or more nucleotides on the first and/or second strand may be modified, to form modified nucleotides.
  • One or more of the odd-numbered nucleotides of the first strand may be modified.
  • One or more of the even-numbered nucleotides of the first strand may be modified by at least a second modification, wherein the at least second modification is different from the modification on the one or more odd nucleotides.
  • At least one of the one or more modified even numbered-nucleotides may be adjacent to at least one of the one or more modified odd- numbered nucleotides.
  • a plurality of odd-numbered nucleotides in the first strand may be modified in the nucleic acid of the invention.
  • a plurality of even-numbered nucleotides in the first strand may be modified by a second modification.
  • the first strand may comprise adjacent nucleotides that are modified by a common modification.
  • the first strand may also comprise adjacent nucleotides that are modified by a second different modification (i.e. , the first strand may comprise nucleotides that are adjacent to each other and modified by a first modification as well as other nucleotides that are adjacent to each other and modified by a second modification that is different to the first modification).
  • One or more of the odd-numbered nucleotides of the second strand may be modified by a modification that is different to the modification of the odd- numbered nucleotides on the first strand (wherein the nucleotides are numbered contiguously starting with nucleotide number 1 at the 5’ end of the first strand) and/or one or more of the even-numbered nucleotides of the second strand may be modified by the same modification of the odd-numbered nucleotides of the first strand.
  • At least one of the one or more modified even-numbered nucleotides of the second strand may be adjacent to the one or more modified odd-numbered nucleotides.
  • a plurality of odd-numbered nucleotides of the second strand may be modified by a common modification and/or a plurality of even-numbered nucleotides may be modified by the same modification that is present on the first stand odd-numbered nucleotides.
  • a plurality of odd-numbered nucleotides on the second strand may be modified by a modification that is different from the modification of the first strand odd-numbered nucleotides.
  • the second strand may comprise adjacent nucleotides that are modified by a common modification, which may be a modification that is different from the modification of the odd- numbered nucleotides of the first strand.
  • each of the odd-numbered nucleotides in the first strand and each of the even-numbered nucleotides in the second strand may be modified with a common modification and, each of the even-numbered nucleotides may be modified in the first strand with a different modification and each of the odd-numbered nucleotides may be modified in the second strand with the different modification.
  • the conjugated nucleic acid of the invention may have the modified nucleotides of the first strand shifted by at least one nucleotide relative to the unmodified or differently modified nucleotides of the second strand.
  • One or more or each of the odd numbered-nucleotides may be modified in the first strand and one or more or each of the even-numbered nucleotides may be modified in the second strand.
  • One or more or each of the alternating nucleotides on either or both strands may be modified by a second modification.
  • One or more or each of the even-numbered nucleotides may be modified in the first strand and one or more or each of the even-numbered nucleotides may be modified in the second strand.
  • One or more or each of the alternating nucleotides on either or both strands may be modified by a second modification.
  • One or more or each of the odd- numbered nucleotides may be modified in the first strand and one or more of the odd- numbered nucleotides may be modified in the second strand by a common modification.
  • One or more or each of the alternating nucleotides on either or both strands may be modified by a second modification.
  • One or more or each of the even-numbered nucleotides may be modified in the first strand and one or more or each of the odd-numbered nucleotides may be modified in the second strand by a common modification.
  • One or more or each of the alternating nucleotides on either or both strands may be modified by a second modification.
  • the conjugated nucleic acid of the invention may comprise single- or double-stranded constructs that comprise at least two regions of alternating modifications in one or both of the strands. These alternating regions can comprise up to about 12 nucleotides but preferably comprise from about 3 to about 10 nucleotides. The regions of alternating nucleotides may be located at the termini of one or both strands of the nucleic acid of the invention.
  • the nucleic acid may comprise from 4 to about 10 nucleotides of alternating nucleotides at each of the termini (3' and 5') and these regions may be separated by from about 5 to about 12 contiguous unmodified or differently or commonly modified nucleotides.
  • the odd numbered nucleotides of the first strand may be modified and the even numbered nucleotides may be modified with a second modification.
  • the second strand may comprise adjacent nucleotides that are modified with a common modification, which may be the same as the modification of the odd-numbered nucleotides of the first strand.
  • One or more nucleotides of the second strand may also be modified with the second modification.
  • One or more nucleotides with the second modification may be adjacent to each other and to nucleotides having a modification that is the same as the modification of the odd-numbered nucleotides of the first strand.
  • the first strand may also comprise phosphorothioate linkages between the two nucleotides at the 3’ end and at the 5’ end or a phosphorodithioate linkage between the two nucleotides at the 3’ end.
  • the second strand may comprise a phosphorothioate or phosphorodithioate linkage between the two nucleotides at the 5’ end.
  • the second strand may also be conjugated to a ligand at the 5’ end.
  • the conjugated nucleic acid of the invention may comprise a first strand comprising adjacent nucleotides that are modified with a common modification.
  • One or more such nucleotides may be adjacent to one or more nucleotides which may be modified with a second modification.
  • One or more nucleotides with the second modification may be adjacent.
  • the second strand may comprise adjacent nucleotides that are modified with a common modification, which may be the same as one of the modifications of one or more nucleotides of the first strand.
  • One or more nucleotides of the second strand may also be modified with the second modification.
  • One or more nucleotides with the second modification may be adjacent.
  • the first strand may also comprise phosphorothioate linkages between the two nucleotides at the 3’ end and at the 5’ end or a phosphorodithioate linkage between the two nucleotides at the 3’ end.
  • the second strand may comprise a phosphorothioate or phosphorodithioate linkage between the two nucleotides at the 3’ end.
  • the second strand may also be conjugated to a ligand at the 5’ end.
  • nucleotides numbered from 5' to 3' on the first strand and 3' to 5' on the second strand, 1, 3, 5, 7, 9, 11, 13, 15, 17, 19, 21, 23 and 25 may be modified by a modification on the first strand.
  • the nucleotides numbered 2, 4, 6, 8, 10, 12, 14, 16, 18, 20, 22 and 24 may be modified by a second modification on the first strand.
  • the nucleotides numbered 1, 3, 5, 7, 9, 11, 13, 15, 17, 19, 21, 23 may be modified by a modification on the second strand.
  • the nucleotides numbered 2, 4, 6, 8, 10, 12, 14, 16, 18, 20, 22 and 24 may be modified by a second modification on the second strand.
  • Nucleotides are numbered for the sake of the nucleic acid of the present invention from 5' to 3' on the first strand and 3' to 5' on the second strand.
  • the nucleotides numbered 2, 4, 6, 8, 10, 12, 14, 16, 18, 20, 22 and 24 may be modified by a modification on the first strand.
  • the nucleotides numbered 1, 3, 5, 7, 9, 11, 13, 15, 17, 19, 21 , 23 may be modified by a second modification on the first strand.
  • the nucleotides numbered 1, 3, 5, 7, 9, 11, 13, 15, 17, 19, 21, 23 may be modified by a modification on the second strand.
  • the nucleotides numbered 2, 4, 6, 8, 10, 12, 14, 16, 18, 20, 22 and 24 may be modified by a second modification on the second strand.
  • first and/or the second strand are shorter than 25 nucleotides in length, such as 19 nucleotides in length, there are no nucleotides numbered 20, 21, 22, 23, 24 and 25 to be modified.
  • nucleotides numbered 20, 21, 22, 23, 24 and 25 there are no nucleotides numbered 20, 21, 22, 23, 24 and 25 to be modified. The skilled person understands the description above to apply to shorter strands, accordingly.
  • One or more modified nucleotides on the first strand may be paired with modified nucleotides on the second strand having a common modification.
  • One or more modified nucleotides on the first strand may be paired with modified nucleotides on the second strand having a different modification.
  • One or more modified nucleotides on the first strand may be paired with unmodified nucleotides on the second strand.
  • One or more modified nucleotides on the second strand may be paired with unmodified nucleotides on the first strand.
  • the alternating nucleotides can be aligned on the two strands such as, for example, all the modifications in the alternating regions of the second strand are paired with identical modifications in the first strand or alternatively the modifications can be offset by one nucleotide with the common modifications in the alternating regions of one strand pairing with dissimilar modifications (i.e. a second or further modification) in the other strand.
  • dissimilar modifications i.e. a second or further modification
  • the modifications on the first strand may be shifted by one nucleotide relative to the modified nucleotides on the second strand, such that common modified nucleotides are not paired with each other.
  • the modification and/or modifications may each and individually be selected from the group consisting of 3' terminal deoxy thymine, 2'-OMe, a 2' deoxy modification, a 2' amino modification, a 2' alkyl modification, a morpholino modification, a phosphoramidate modification, 5'-phosphorothioate group modification, a 5' phosphate or 5' phosphate mimic modification and a cholesteryl derivative or a dodecanoic acid bisdecylamide group modification and/or the modified nucleotide may be any one of a locked nucleotide, an abasic nucleotide or a non-natural base comprising nucleotide.
  • At least one modification may be 2'-OMe and/or at least one modification may be 2'-F. Further modifications as described herein may be present on the first and/or second strand.
  • the nucleic acid of the invention may comprise an inverted RNA nucleotide at one or several of the strand ends.
  • Such inverted nucleotides provide stability to the nucleic acid.
  • the nucleic acid comprises at least an inverted nucleotide at the 3’ end of the first and/or the second strand and/or at the 5’ end of the second strand. More preferably, the nucleic acid comprises an inverted nucleotide at the 3’ end of the second strand.
  • the nucleic acid comprises an inverted RNA nucleotide at the 3’ end of the second strand and this nucleotide is preferably an inverted A.
  • An inverted nucleotide is a nucleotide that is linked to the 3’ end of a nucleic acid through its 3’ carbon, rather than its 5’ carbon as would normally be the case or is linked to the 5’ end of a nucleic acid through its 5’ carbon, rather than its 3’ carbon as would normally be the case.
  • the inverted nucleotide is preferably present at an end of a strand not as an overhang but opposite a corresponding nucleotide in the other strand. Accordingly, the nucleic acid is preferably blunt-ended at the end that comprises the inverted RNA nucleotide.
  • An inverted RNA nucleotide being present at the end of a strand preferably means that the last nucleotide at this end of the strand is the inverted RNA nucleotide.
  • a nucleic acid with such a nucleotide is stable and easy to synthesise.
  • the inverted RNA nucleotide is preferably an unmodified nucleotide in the sense that it does not comprise any modifications compared to the natural nucleotide counterpart.
  • the inverted RNA nucleotide is preferably a 2’-OH nucleotide.
  • Conjugated nucleic acids of the invention may comprise one or more nucleotides modified at the 2’ position with a 2’-H, and therefore having a DNA nucleotide within the nucleic acid.
  • Nucleic acids of the invention may comprise DNA nucleotides at positions 2 and/or 14 of the first strand counting from the 5’ end of the first strand.
  • Nucleic acids may comprise DNA nucleotides on the second strand which correspond to position 11, or 13, or 11 and 13, or 11- 13 of the first strand.
  • Conjugated nucleic acids of the invention may comprise one or more LNA nucleotides.
  • Nucleic acids of the invention may comprise LNA nucleotides at positions 2 and/or 14 of the first strand counting from the 5’ end of the first strand.
  • Nucleic acids may comprise LNA on the second strand which correspond to position 11, or 13, or 11 and 13, or 11-13 of the first strand.
  • the nucleic acid portion of the conjugated nucleic acid may comprise a first modification and a second or further modification which are each and individually selected from the group comprising 2'-OMe modification and 2'-F modification.
  • the nucleic acid may comprise a modification that is 2'-OMe that may be a first modification, and a second modification that is 2'-F.
  • the nucleic acid of the invention may also include a phosphorothioate or phosphorodithioate modification and/or a deoxy modification which may be present in or between the terminal 2 or 3 nucleotides of each or any end of each or both strands.
  • At least one nucleotide of the first and/or second strand is a modified nucleotide, wherein if the first strand comprises at least one modified nucleotide:
  • At least one, several, or all the nucleotides of the second strand in a position corresponding to nucleotide 11 or nucleotide 13 or nucleotides 11 and 13 or nucleotides 11-13 of the first strand is/are modified by a fourth modification;
  • nucleotides on the first strand are numbered consecutively starting with nucleotide number 1 at the 5’ end of the first strand; wherein the modifications are preferably at least one of the following:
  • the first modification is preferably different from the second and from the third modification
  • the first modification is preferably the same as the fourth modification
  • the first modification is preferably a 2’-F modification
  • the second modification is preferably a 2’-OMe modification
  • the third modification is preferably a 2’-OMe modification
  • the fourth modification is preferably a 2’-F modification.
  • the 3' and 5' ends of an oligonucleotide can be modified. Such modifications can be at the 3' end or the 5' end or both ends of the molecule. They can include modification or replacement of an entire terminal phosphate or of one or more of the atoms of the phosphate group.
  • the 3' and 5' ends of an oligonucleotide can be conjugated to other functional molecular entities such as labelling moieties, e.g., fluorophores (e.g., pyrene, TAMRA, fluorescein, Cy3 or Cy5 dyes) or protecting groups (based e.g., on sulfur, silicon, boron or ester).
  • labelling moieties e.g., fluorophores (e.g., pyrene, TAMRA, fluorescein, Cy3 or Cy5 dyes) or protecting groups (based e.g., on sulfur, silicon, boron or ester).
  • the functional molecular entities can be attached to the sugar through a phosphate group and/or a linker.
  • the terminal atom of the linker can connect to or replace the linking atom of the phosphate group or the C-3' or C-5' O, N, S or C group of the sugar.
  • the linker can connect to or replace the terminal atom of a nucleotide surrogate (e.g., PNAs).
  • the 3' end can be an — OH group.
  • terminal modifications include dyes, intercalating agents (e.g., acridines), cross-linkers (e.g., psoralene, mitomycin C), porphyrins (TPPC4, texaphyrin, Sapphyrin), polycyclic aromatic hydrocarbons (e.g., phenazine, dihydrophenazine), artificial endonucleases, EDTA, lipophilic carriers (e.g., cholesterol, cholic acid, adamantane acetic acid, 1 -pyrene butyric acid, dihydrotestosterone, 1,3-Bis-0(hexadecyl)glycerol, geranyloxyhexyl group, hexadecylglycerol, borneol, menthol, 1,3-propanediol, heptadecyl group, palmitic acid, myristic acid, 03-(oleoyl)lithocholic acid, 03-
  • Terminal modifications can also be useful for monitoring distribution, and in such cases the groups to be added may include fluorophores, e.g., fluorescein or an Alexa dye. Terminal modifications can also be useful for enhancing uptake, useful modifications for this include cholesterol. Terminal modifications can also be useful for cross-linking an RNA agent to another moiety.
  • fluorophores e.g., fluorescein or an Alexa dye.
  • Terminal modifications can also be useful for enhancing uptake, useful modifications for this include cholesterol. Terminal modifications can also be useful for cross-linking an RNA agent to another moiety.
  • Terminal modifications can be added for a number of reasons, including to modulate activity or to modulate resistance to degradation.
  • Terminal modifications useful for modulating activity include modification of the 5' end with phosphate or phosphate analogues.
  • Nucleic acids of the invention, on the first or second strand, may be 5' phosphorylated or include a phosphoryl analogue at the 5' prime terminus.
  • 5'-phosphate modifications include those which are compatible with RISC mediated gene silencing.
  • Suitable modifications include: 5'- monophosphate ((H0) 2 (0) P—O-5'); 5'-diphosphate ((H0) 2 (0)P— O— P(H0)(0)— 0-5'); 5'- triphosphate (( H O) 2 (0) P — O — ( H O) (O) P — O — P ( H O) (O) — O- 5 ') ; 5'-guanosine cap (7- methylated or non-methylated) (7m-G-0-5'-(H0)(0)P — O — (H0)(0)P — O — P(H0)(0) — 0-5'); 5'-adenosine cap (Appp), and any modified or unmodified nucleotide cap structure (N — 0-5'- (H0)(0)P — O — (H0)(0)P — O — P(H0)(0) — 0-5'); 5'-monothiophosphate (phosphoroth
  • moieties may be linked to the 5' terminus of the first strand or the second strand. These include abasic ribose moiety, abasic deoxyribose moiety, modifications abasic ribose and abasic deoxyribose moieties including 2 -0 alkyl modifications; inverted abasic ribose and abasic deoxyribose moieties and modifications thereof, C6-imino-Pi; a mirror nucleotide including L-DNA and L-RNA; 5'OMe nucleotide; and nucleotide analogues including 4', 5'- methylene nucleotide; 1- ⁇ -D-erythrofuranosyl)nucleotide; 4'-thio nucleotide, carbocyclic nucleotide; 5'-amino-alkyl phosphate; 1,3-diamino-2-propyl phosphate, 3-aminopropy
  • a C-terminal “-OH” moiety may be substituted for a C- terminal “-NH 2 ” moiety, and vice-versa.
  • the invention also provides a conjugated nucleic acid according to any aspect of the invention described herein, wherein the nucleic acid has a terminal 5’ (E)-vinylphosphonate nucleotide at its 5’ end.
  • the conjugated nucleic acid has a first strand and a second strand
  • the first strand may have a terminal 5’ (E)-vinylphosphonate nucleotide at its 5’ end.
  • the terminal 5’ (E)-vinylphosphonate nucleotide is preferably linked to the second nucleotide in the strand by a phosphodiester (PO) linkage.
  • the conjugated nucleic acid in particular the first strand of the conjugated nucleic acid when the nucleic acid has a first strand and a second strand, may comprise formula (I):
  • ‘(vp)-’ is the 5’ (E)-vinylphosphonate
  • ‘N’ is a nucleotide
  • ‘po’ is a phosphodiester linkage
  • n is from 1 to (the total number of nucleotides in the first strand - 2), preferably wherein n is from 1 to (the total number of nucleotides in the first strand -3), more preferably wherein n is from 1 to (the total number of nucleotides in the first strand -4).
  • the terminal 5’ (E)-vinylphosphonate nucleotide is an RNA nucleotide, preferably a (vp)-U. More preferably, the terminal 5’ (E)-vinylphosphonate nucleotide is a 2’OMe modified RNA nucleotide, such as (vp)-2’OMe-U.
  • Nucleotides with a natural phosphate Nucleotide with a E-vinylphosphonate at the 5’-end at the 5’-end
  • a 5’ (E)-vinylphosphonate is a 5’ phosphate mimic.
  • a biological mimic is a molecule that is capable of carrying out the same function as and is structurally very similar to the original molecule that is being mimicked.
  • 5’ (E)- vinylphosphonate mimics the function of a normal 5’ phosphate, e.g. enabling efficient RISC loading.
  • 5’ (E) vinylphosphonate is capable of stabilizing the 5’-end nucleotide by protecting it from dephosphorylation by enzymes such as phosphatases.
  • the first strand has a terminal 5’ (E)-vinylphosphonate nucleotide at its 5’ end, the terminal 5’ (E)-vinylphosphonate nucleotide is linked to the second nucleotide in the first strand by a phosphodiester linkage and the first strand comprises a) more than 1 phosphodiester (PO) linkage; b) phosphodiester (PO) linkages between at least the terminal three 5’ nucleotides and/or c) phosphodiester (PO) linkages between at least the terminal four 5’ nucleotides.
  • PO phosphodiester
  • the first strand and/or the second strand of the conjugated nucleic acid comprises at least one phosphorothioate (PS) internucleotide linkage. In one aspect, the first strand and/or the second strand of the nucleic acid comprises more than one phosphorothioate (PS) internucleotide linkages.
  • PS phosphorothioate
  • the first strand and/or the second strand of the conjugated nucleic acid comprises a phosphorothioate (PS) linkage between the terminal two or three 3’ nucleotides.
  • the linkages between the other nucleotides in the first strand and/or the second strand are phosphodiester (PO) linkages.
  • the first strand and/or the second strand of the conjugated nucleic acid comprises a phosphorothioate (PS) linkage between the terminal two 5’ nucleotides or phosphorothioate (PS) linkages between the terminal three 5’ nucleotides.
  • the linkages between the other nucleotides in the first strand and/or the second strand are phosphodiester (PO) linkages.
  • the conjugated nucleic acid of the present invention comprises one or more phosphorothioate (PS) internucleotide linkages on one or more of the terminal ends of the first and/or the second strand.
  • each or either end of the first strand may comprise one or two or three phosphorothioate (PS) internucleotide linkages.
  • each or either end of the second strand may comprise one or two or three phosphorothioate (PS) internucleotide linkages.
  • the conjugated nucleic acid comprises a phosphorothioate (PS) linkage between the terminal two or three 3’ nucleotides and/or 5’ nucleotides of the first and/or the second strand.
  • the nucleic acid comprises a phosphorothioate (PS) linkage between each of the terminal three 3’ nucleotides and the terminal three 5’ nucleotides of the first strand and of the second strand.
  • all remaining linkages between nucleotides of the first and/or of the second strand are phosphodiester (PO) linkages.
  • the nucleic acid comprises a phosphorothioate (PS) linkage between the terminal three 3’ nucleotides and the terminal three 5’ nucleotides of the first strand and of the second strand.
  • PS phosphorothioate
  • all remaining linkages between nucleotides of the first and/or of the second strand are phosphodiester (PO) linkages.
  • conjugated nucleic acid :
  • (ii) is conjugated to a triantennary ligand either on the 3’ end nucleotide or on the 5’ end nucleotide of the second strand;
  • (iii) has a phosphorothioate (PS) linkage between the terminal three nucleotides of the second strand at the end opposite to the one conjugated to the triantennary ligand; and
  • nucleotides of the first and/or of the second strand are phosphodiester (PO) linkages.
  • nucleotides of the first and/or of the second strand are phosphodiester (PS2) linkages.
  • the first strand and/or the second strand of the conjugated nucleic acid comprises at least one phosphorodithioate (PS2) internucleotide linkage. In one aspect, the first strand and/or the second strand of the nucleic acid comprises more than one phosphorodithioate (PS2) internucleotide linkages, such as two, three, four or five phosphorodithioate (PS2) internucleotide linkages.
  • PS2 phosphorodithioate
  • the first strand and/or the second strand of the conjugated nucleic acid comprises a phosphorodithioate (PS2) linkage between the terminal two or three 3’ nucleotides.
  • PS2 phosphorodithioate
  • the linkages between the other nucleotides in the first strand and/or the second strand are phosphodiester (PO) linkages.
  • the first strand and/or the second strand of the conjugated nucleic acid comprises a phosphorodithioate (PS2) linkage between the terminal two 5’ nucleotides or phosphorodithioate (PS2) linkages between the terminal three 5’ nucleotides.
  • the linkages between the other nucleotides in the first strand and/or the second strand are phosphodiester (PO) linkages.
  • the conjugated nucleic acid of the present invention comprises one or more phosphorodithioate (PS2) internucleotide linkages on one or more of the terminal ends of the first and/or the second strand.
  • the conjugated nucleic acid comprises a phosphorodithioate (PS2) linkage between the terminal two or three 3’ nucleotides of the first and/or the second strand and/or between the terminal two or three 5’ nucleotides of the second strand.
  • the nucleic acid comprises a phosphorodithioate (PS2) linkage between each of the terminal two 3’ nucleotides of the first and the second strand and between the terminal two 5’ nucleotides of the second strand.
  • all remaining linkages between nucleotides of the first and/or of the second strand are phosphodiester (PO) linkages.
  • the conjugated nucleic acid comprises a phosphorodithioate (PS2) linkage between each of the two, three or four terminal nucleotides at the 3’ end of the first strand and/or comprises a phosphorodithioate (PS2) linkage between each of the two, three or four terminal nucleotides at the 3’ end of the second strand and/or a phosphorodithioate (PS2) linkage between each of the two, three or four terminal nucleotides at the 5’ end of the second strand, and wherein the nucleic acid comprises a linkage other than a phosphorodithioate (PS2) linkage between the two, three or four terminal nucleotides at the 5’ end of the first strand.
  • all internucleotide linkages in the first strand and/or the second strand that are not phosphorodithioate (PS2) internucleotide linkages are phosphodiester (PO) internucleotide linkages.
  • the conjugated nucleic acid comprises a phosphorodithioate (PS2) linkage between the two nucleotides at the 3’ end of the first strand and/or comprises a phosphorodithioate (PS2) linkage between the two terminal nucleotides at the 3’ end of the second strand and/or a phosphorodithioate (PS2) linkage between the two terminal nucleotides at the 5’ end of the second strand, and wherein the nucleic acid comprises a linkage other than a phosphorodithioate (PS2) linkage between the two, three or four terminal nucleotides at the 5’ end of the first strand.
  • all internucleotide linkages in the first strand and/or the second strand that are not phosphorodithioate (PS2) internucleotide linkages are phosphodiester (PO) internucleotide linkages.
  • (iii) has a phosphorodithioate (PS2) linkage between the terminal two nucleotides of the second strand at the end opposite to the one conjugated to the triantennary ligand or between the terminal two nucleotides at both ends of the strand; and
  • PS2 phosphorodithioate
  • nucleotides of the first and/or of the second strand are phosphodiester (PO) linkages.
  • (ii) has a phosphorodithioate (PS2) linkage between the terminal two 3’ nucleotides on the first and second strand and between the terminal two 5’ nucleotides on the second strand; and
  • PS2 phosphorodithioate
  • nucleotides of the first and/or of the second strand are phosphodiester (PO) linkages.
  • a phosphorodithioate (PS2) linkage in the conjugated nucleic acids of the invention reduces the variation in the stereochemistry of a population of nucleic acid molecules compared to molecules comprising a phosphorothioate (PS) with undefined stereochemistry in that same position.
  • Phosphorothioate (PS) linkages introduce chiral centres and it is difficult to control which non-linking oxygen is substituted for sulphur.
  • PS2 phosphorodithioate
  • the conjugated nucleic acid comprises a phosphorodithioate (PS2) linkage between the two terminal nucleotides at the 3’ end of the first strand and a phosphorodithioate (PS2) linkage between the two terminal nucleotides at the 3’ end of the second strand and a phosphorodithioate (PS2) linkage between the two terminal nucleotides at the 5’ end of the second strand and comprises a linkage other than a phosphorodithioate (PS2) linkage between the two, three or four terminal nucleotides at the 5’ end of the first strand.
  • PS2 phosphorodithioate
  • the first strand has a terminal 5’ (E)-vinylphosphonate nucleotide at its 5’ end.
  • This terminal 5’ (E)-vinylphosphonate nucleotide is preferably linked to the second nucleotide in the first strand by a phosphodiester (PO) linkage.
  • PO phosphodiester
  • all the linkages between the nucleotides of both strands other than the linkage between the two terminal nucleotides at the 3’ end of the first strand and the linkages between the two terminal nucleotides at the 3’ end and at the 5’ end of the second strand are phosphodiester (PO) linkages.
  • the conjugated nucleic acid comprises a phosphorothioate (PS) linkage between each of the three terminal 3’ nucleotides and/or between each of the three terminal 5’ nucleotides on the first strand, and/or between each of the three terminal 3’ nucleotides and/or between each of the three terminal 5’ nucleotides of the second strand when there is no phosphorodithioate (PS2) linkage present at that end.
  • PS2 linkage being present at an end means that the linkage between the two terminal nucleotides, or preferably between the three terminal nucleotides of the nucleic acid end in question are linkages other than phosphorodithioate (PS2) linkages.
  • all the linkages of the nucleic acid between the nucleotides of both strands other than the linkage between the two terminal nucleotides at the 3’ end of the first strand and the linkages between the two terminal nucleotides at the 3’ end and at the 5’ end of the second strand are phosphodiester (PO) linkages.
  • the entire nucleic acid including any hybridised strand (such as the first strand and the second strand) and the ligand, is free of phosphorothioates (PS).
  • PS phosphorothioates
  • all internucleotide linkages in the nucleic acid are linkages other than phosphorothioates (PS) and are preferably phosphodiesters (PO) or phosphorodithioates (PS2);
  • all phosphate bonds in the ligand are bonds other than phosphorothioates (PS), and are preferably phosphodiesters (PO) or phosphorodithioates (PS2);
  • all internucleotide linkages in the nucleic acid are linkages or bonds other than phosphorothioates (PS), and are preferably phosphodiesters (PO) or phosphorodithioates (PS2); or
  • the nucleic acid is a siRNA and all internucleotide linkages in the siRNA are phosphodiesters (PO) or phosphorodithioates (PS2).
  • a phosphate linkage can also be modified by replacement of a linking oxygen with nitrogen (bridged phosphoroamidates), sulfur (bridged phosphorothioates) and carbon (bridged methylenephosphonates). The replacement can occur at a terminal oxygen. Replacement of the non-linking oxygens with nitrogen is possible.
  • the phosphate groups can also individually be replaced by non-phosphorus containing connectors.
  • moieties which can replace the phosphate group include siloxane, carbonate, carboxymethyl, carbamate, amide, thioether, ethylene oxide linker, sulfonate, sulfonamide, thioformacetal, formacetal, oxime, methyleneimino, methylenemethylimino, methylenehydrazo, methylenedimethylhydrazo and methyleneoxymethylimino.
  • replacements may include the methylenecarbonylamino and methylenemethylimino groups.
  • the phosphate linkage and ribose sugar of a nucleotide may be replaced by nuclease resistant nucleotides.
  • nuclease resistant nucleotides examples include the morpholino, cyclobutyl, pyrrolidine and peptide nucleic acid (PNA) nucleotide surrogates.
  • PNA peptide nucleic acid
  • the conjugated nucleic acid which is preferably an siRNA that inhibits expression of a target gene, preferably via RNAi, and preferably in a cell, comprises one or more or all of:
  • each of the odd-numbered nucleotides of the first strand as numbered starting from one at the 5’ end of the first strand are 2’-OMe modified nucleotides;
  • each of the even-numbered nucleotides of the first strand as numbered starting from one at the 5’ end of the first strand are 2’-F modified nucleotides;
  • the second strand nucleotide corresponding to position 11 and/or 13 or 11-13 of the first strand is modified by a modification other than a 2’-OMe modification, preferably wherein one or both or all of these positions comprise a 2’-F modification;
  • the first strand has a terminal 5’ (E)-vinylphosphonate nucleotide at its 5’ end, in which case the terminal 5’ (E)-vinylphosphonate nucleotide is preferably a uridine and is preferably linked to the second nucleotide in the first strand by a phosphodiester (PO) linkage.
  • E phosphorodithioate
  • the nucleic acids of the invention is conjugated to a ligand.
  • Efficient delivery of oligonucleotides, in particular double-stranded nucleic acids, to cells in vivo is important and requires specific targeting and substantial protection from the extracellular environment, preferably serum proteins.
  • One method of achieving specific targeting is to conjugate a ligand to the nucleic acid.
  • the ligand helps in targeting the nucleic acid to a target cell which has a cell surface receptor that binds to and internalises the conjugated ligand.
  • a ligand which can mediate internalization of the nucleic acid into a target cell by mechanisms other than receptor mediated endocytosis may alternatively be conjugated to a nucleic acid of the invention for cell or tissue specific targeting.
  • the ligand can be conjugated to either one of the strands, preferably at the end of a strand, more particularly to the last nucleotide at one end of a strand.
  • the ligand is preferably conjugated to the ribose of a nucleotides, preferably the last of a strand.
  • the ligand can be conjugated to the ribose of a nucleotide, preferably the last on in a strand, via the 2’, 3’ or 5’ carbon of the ribose. Preferred are the 3’ or 5’ carbon.
  • the ligand is preferably not conjugated to the 5’ end of the first strand.
  • the ligand is preferably conjugated to the 5’ end of the second strand.
  • the ligand is preferably conjugated to the last nucleotide of a nucleic acid strand, preferably to the ribose moiety.
  • the ligand can be conjugated to the first strand (the antisense strand) or the second strand (the antisense strand).
  • the ligand is conjugated to a nucleotide at the end of one of the strands of the nucleic acid, more preferably the nucleotide at the 3’ or 5’ end of the second (sense) strand.
  • ASGP-R asialoglycoprotein receptor complex
  • the ASGP-R complex is composed of varying ratios of multimers of membrane ASGR1 and ASGR2 receptors, which are highly abundant on hepatocytes.
  • One of the first disclosures of the use of triantennary cluster glycosides as conjugated ligands was in US patent number US 5,885,968.
  • Conjugates having three GalNAc ligands and comprising phosphate groups are known and are described in Dubber et al. (Bioconjug. Chem. 2003 Jan-Feb;14(1):239-46.).
  • the ASGP-R complex shows a 50-fold higher affinity for N-Acetyl-D-Galactosamine (GalNAc) than D-Gal.
  • the ASGP-R complex recognizes specifically terminal b-galactosyl subunits of glycosylated proteins or other oligosaccharides (Weigel, P.H. et. al., Biochim. Biophys. Acta. 2002 Sep 19;1572(2-3):341-63) and can be used for delivering a drug to the liver’s hepatocytes expressing the receptor complex by covalent coupling of galactose or galactosamine to the drug substance (Ishibashi.S. ; et. al., J Biol. Chem. 1994 Nov 11;269(45):27803-6). Furthermore, the binding affinity can be significantly increased by the multi-valency effect, which is achieved by the repetition of the targeting moiety (Biessen EA, et al., J Med Chem. 1995 Apr 28;38(9): 1538-46).
  • the ASGP-R complex is a mediator for an active uptake of terminal b-galactosyl containing glycoproteins to the cell’s endosomes.
  • the ASGPR is highly suitable for targeted delivery of drug candidates conjugated to such ligands like, e.g., nucleic acids into receptor-expressing cells (Akinc et al., Mol Ther. 2010 Jul; 18(7): 1357-64).
  • the ligand can comprise a saccharide that is selected to have an affinity for at least one type of receptor on a target cell.
  • the receptor is on the surface of a mammalian liver cell, for example, the hepatic asialoglycoprotein receptor complex described before (ASGP-R).
  • the ligand of the conjugated nucleic acid preferably comprises at least one saccharide.
  • the ligand is preferably selected from N-acetyl galactosamine (GalNAc), mannose, galactose, glucose, glucosamine and fucose, more preferably at least one N-acetyl galactosamine (GalNAc).
  • the ligand of the conjugated nucleic acid comprises:
  • At least one N-acetyl galactosamine (GalNAc); and (ii) a linker, wherein the linker conjugates the at least one N-acetyl galactosamine (GalNAc) to the nucleic acid.
  • the linker may be a monovalent structure or bivalent or trivalent or tetravalent branched structure.
  • the ligand of the conjugated nucleic acid is a compound of formula (II):
  • S represents a saccharide, preferably wherein the saccharide is N-acetyl galactosamine (GalNAc);
  • X 1 represents C3-C6 alkylene or (-CH 2 -CH 2 -0) m (-CH 2 ) 2 - wherein m is 1, 2, or 3;
  • P is independently in each instance a phosphodiester (PO) or a modified phosphate, preferably a phosphorodithioate (PS2);
  • X 3 represents a bridging unit; wherein X 3 is conjugated to the nucleic acid via a phosphodiester (PO) or a modified phosphate, preferably a phosphorodithioate (PS2).
  • PO phosphodiester
  • PS2 phosphorodithioate
  • the branching unit “A” preferably branches into three in order to accommodate three saccharide ligands.
  • the branching unit is preferably covalently attached to the remaining tethered portions of the ligand and the nucleic acid.
  • the branching unit may comprise a branched aliphatic group comprising groups selected from alkyl, amide, disulphide, polyethylene glycol, ether, thioether and hydroxyamino groups.
  • the branching unit may comprise groups selected from alkyl and ether groups.
  • the branching unit may have the structure:
  • the branching unit may have the structure:
  • the branching unit may have the structure:
  • the branching unit A may have a structure selected from: wherein:
  • R 1 is hydrogen or C1-C10 alkylene; and R 2 is C1-C10 alkylene.
  • the branching unit consists of only a carbon atom.
  • the “X 3 ” portion is a bridging unit.
  • the bridging unit is linear and is covalently bound to the branching unit and the nucleic acid.
  • X 3 may be selected from -C1-C2 0 alkylene-, -C2-C2 0 alkenylene-, an alkylene ether of formula - (C1-C20 alkylene)-0-(Ci-C2o alkylene)-, -C(0)-Ci-C2o alkylene-, -C0-C4 alkylene(Cy)Co-C4 alkylene- wherein Cy represents a substituted or unsubstituted 5 or 6 membered cycloalkylene, arylene, heterocyclylene or heteroarylene ring, -C1-C4 alkylene-NHC(0)-Ci-C 4 alkylene-, -Ci- C4 alkylene-C(0)NH-Ci-C4 alkylene-, -C1-C4 alkylene-SC(0)-Ci-C4 alkylene-, -C1-C4 alkylene- C(0)S-Ci-C4 alkylene-, -C1-
  • X 3 may be an alkylene ether of formula -(C1-C2 0 alkylene)-0-(Ci-C 2 o alkylene)-.
  • X 3 may be an alkylene ether of formula -(C1-C20 alkylene)-0-(C4-C2o alkylene)-, wherein said (C4-C20 alkylene) is linked to Z.
  • X 3 may, preferably when A consists of only a carbon atom, be selected from the group consisting of -CH2-O-C3H6-, -CH2-O-C4H8-, -CH2-O-C6H12- and -CH2-O-C8H16-, especially -CH2-O-C4H8-, -CH2-O-C6H12- and -CH2-O-C8H16-, wherein in each case the -CH2- group is linked to A.
  • the ligand of the conjugated nucleic acid is a compound of formula (III):
  • S represents a saccharide, preferably wherein the saccharide is N-acetyl galactosamine (GalNAc);
  • X 1 represents C3-C6 alkylene or (-CH 2 -CH 2 -0) m (-CH 2 ) 2 - wherein m is 1, 2, or 3;
  • P is independently in each instance a phosphodiester (PO) or a modified phosphate, preferably a phosphorodithioate (PS2);
  • X 2 is Ci-Cs alkylene
  • A is a branching unit selected from:
  • X 3 is a bridging unit; wherein X 3 is conjugated to the nucleic acid via a phosphodiester (PO) or a modified phosphate, preferably a phosphorodithioate (PS2).
  • PO phosphodiester
  • PS2 phosphorodithioate
  • the branching unit A may have the structure:
  • the branching unit A may have the structure: , wherein X 3 is attached to the nitrogen atom.
  • X 3 may be C1-C20 alkylene.
  • X 3 is selected from the group consisting of -C3H6-, - C4H8-, -C6H12- and -OdH ⁇ d-, especially -C4H8-,-C6Hi2- and -C8H16-.
  • the ligand of the conjugated nucleic acid is a compound of formula (IV):
  • S represents a saccharide, preferably wherein the saccharide is N-acetyl galactosamine (GalNAc);
  • X 1 represents C3-C6 alkylene or (-CH 2 -CH 2 -0) m (-CH 2 ) 2 - wherein m is 1, 2, or 3;
  • P is independently in each instance a phosphodiester (PO) or a modified phosphate, preferably a phosphorodithioate (PS2);
  • X 3 is an alkylene ether of formula selected from the group consisting of -CH 2 -0-CH 2 -, -
  • the branching unit may comprise carbon.
  • the branching unit is a carbon.
  • X 3 may be selected from the group consisting of -CH 2 -0-C 4 H 8 -, -CH 2 -0-C 5 HI O -, -0H 2 -0-0 d Hi 2 - , -CH 2 -0-C 7 HI 4 -, and -0H 2 -0-0 d H ⁇ 6 -.
  • X 3 is selected from the group consisting of - CH 2 -0-C 4 HS-, -0H 2 -0-0dHi 2 - and -CH 2 -0-C8Hi6.
  • X 1 may be (-CH 2 -CH 2 -0)(-CH 2 ) 2 -.
  • X 1 may be (-CH 2 -CH 2 -0) 2 (-CH 2 ) 2 -.
  • X 1 may be (-CH 2 -CH 2 - 0) 3 (-CH 2 ) 2 -.
  • X 1 is (-CH 2 -CH 2 -0) 2 (-CH 2 ) 2 -.
  • X 1 represents C3-C6 alkylene.
  • X 1 may be propylene.
  • X 1 may be butylene.
  • X 1 may be pentylene.
  • X 1 may be hexylene.
  • the alkyl is a linear alkylene. In particular, X 1 may be butylene.
  • X 2 represents an alkylene ether of formula -C 3 H 6 -0-CH 2 - i.e. C3 alkoxy methylene, or - CH 2 CH 2 CH 2 OCH 2 -.
  • R x represents C1-C6 alkyl and wherein H indicates attachment to the remainder of the compound.
  • modified phosphate it is meant a phosphate group wherein one or more of the non-linking oxygens is replaced.
  • modified phosphate groups include phosphorothioate (PS), phosphorodithioates (PS2), phosphoroselenates, borano phosphates, borano phosphate esters, hydrogen phosphonates, phosphoroamidates, alkyl or aryl phosphonates and phosphotriesters.
  • Phosphorothioates (PS) have one of the non-linking oxygens of a phosphate group replaced by sulphur.
  • Phosphorodithioates (PS2) have both non-linking oxygens of a phosphate group replaced by sulphur.
  • One, each or both non-linking oxygens in the phosphate group can be independently any one of S, Se, B, C, H, N, or OR (R is alkyl or aryl).
  • the phosphate can also be modified by replacement of a linking oxygen with nitrogen (bridged phosphoroamidates), sulfur (bridged phosphorothioates) and carbon (bridged methylenephosphonates).
  • the replacement can occur at a terminal oxygen. Replacement of the non-linking oxygens with nitrogen is possible.
  • the modified phosphate group is a thiophosphate group.
  • the inventors have found that conjugates having thiophosphate groups in replacement of phosphate groups potentially have improved potency and/or duration of action in vivo.
  • the modified phosphate is a phosphorodithioate (PS2)
  • the conjugates have fewer stereocentres as compared to a counterpart in which the modified phosphate is a phosphorothioate (PS) with an undefined stereocentre.
  • the saccharide may be selected to have an affinity for at least one type of receptor on a target cell.
  • the receptor is on the surface of a mammalian liver cell, for example, the hepatic asialoglycoprotein receptor complex (ASGP-R).
  • each P is independently a phosphodiester (PO) or a phosphorodithioate (PS2); and/or (ii) at least one P is a phosphorodithioate (PS2).
  • At least two P of formula (II), (III) or (IV) are phosphorodithioates (PS2) and most preferably all P are phosphorodithioates (PS2).
  • any of the ligands are preferably conjugated to the nucleic acid via a phosphorodithioate (PS2).
  • PS2 that links the ligand to the nucleic acid is preferably directly linked to the 2’, 3’ or 5’ carbon of the ribose of a nucleotide of the nucleic acid, preferably of a terminal nucleotide, i.e. the nucleotide at one of the ends of the nuclei acid.
  • nucleotide When the ligand is conjugated to the nucleic acid via a phosphorodithioate (PS2) attached on a carbon of the last nucleotide of a nucleic acid strand, said nucleotide is preferably linked to the next nucleotide in the nucleic acid strand via a linkage other than a phosphorodithioate (PS2), such as a phosphodiester (PO) or a phosphorothioate (PS), preferably a phosphodiester (PO).
  • PS2 phosphorodithioate
  • PO phosphodiester
  • PS phosphorothioate
  • the saccharide S may be selected from N-acetyl with one or more of galactosamine, mannose, galactose, glucose, glucosamine and fructose.
  • a ligand to be used in the present invention may include N-acetyl galactosamine (GalNAc).
  • the compounds of the invention may have 3 saccharides, which are each preferably N-acetyl galactosamine (GalNAc).
  • GalNAc refers to 2-(Acetylamino)-2-deoxy-D-galactopyranose, commonly referred to in the literature as N-acetyl galactosamine.
  • Reference to “GalNAc” or “N-acetyl galactosamine” includes both the b- form: 2-(Acetylamino)-2-deoxy ⁇ -D-galactopyranose and the a-form: 2- (Acetylamino)-2-deoxy-a-D- galactopyranose.
  • both the b-form: 2- (Acetylamino)-2-deoxy ⁇ -D-galactopyranose and a-form: 2-(Acetylamino)-2-deoxy-a-D- galactopyranose may be used interchangeably.
  • the compounds of the invention comprise the b-form, 2-(Acetylamino)-2-deoxy ⁇ -D-galactopyranose.
  • 2-(Acetylamino)-2-deoxy-D-galactopyranose 2-(Acetylamino)-2-deoxy-a-D-galactopyranose
  • the ligand including the linkage to the nucleic acid (the linkage between X 3 and the nucleic acid in formulae (II), (III) and (IV)), is selected from: For each of these, the ligand is attached via the phosphorothioate (PO) or phosphorodithioate (PS2) on the right end of each formula to the nucleic acid.
  • the phosphorothioate (PO) or phosphorodithioate (PS2) is preferably attached to the 2’, 3’ or 5’ carbon of the ribose of a nucleotide. Preferably, it is attached to the 2’, 3’ or 5’ carbon of the ribose of a terminal nucleotide.
  • a ligand of formula (II), (III) or (IV) or any one of the triantennary ligands disclosed herein can be attached at the 3’-end of the first (antisense) strand and/or at any of the 3’ and/or 5’ end of the second (sense) strand.
  • the conjugated nucleic acid can comprise more than one ligand of formula (II), (III) or (IV) or any one of the triantennary ligands disclosed herein.
  • a single ligand of formula (II), (III) or (IV) or any one of the triantennary ligands disclosed herein is preferred because a single such ligand is sufficient for efficient targeting of the nucleic acid to the target cells.
  • the 5’-end of the first (antisense) strand is not attached to a ligand of formula (II), (III) or (IV) or any one of the triantennary ligands disclosed herein, since a ligand in this position can potentially interfere with the biological activity of the nucleic acid.
  • a nucleic acid with a single ligand of formula (II), (III) or (IV) or any one of the triantennary ligands disclosed herein at the 5’ end of a strand is easier and therefore cheaper to synthesise than the same nucleic acid with the same ligand at the 3’ end.
  • a single ligand of any of formulae (II), (III) or (IV) or any one of the triantennary ligands disclosed herein is covalently attached to (conjugated with) the 5’ end of the second strand of the nucleic acid, preferably to the 5’ carbon of the ribose of the last nucleotide of the nucleic acid.
  • the cells that are targeted by the nucleic acid with a ligand are hepatocytes.
  • the GalNAc may be substituted for any other targeting ligand, such as those mentioned herein, preferably mannose, galactose, glucose, glucosamine and fucose.
  • the nucleic acid is conjugated to a ligand that comprises a lipid, and more preferably, a ligand that comprises a cholesterol.
  • compositions uses and methods
  • the present invention also provides compositions comprising a conjugated nucleic acid of the invention.
  • the conjugated nucleic acids and compositions may be used as medicaments or as diagnostic agents, alone or in combination with other agents.
  • one or more conjugated nucleic acid(s) of the invention can be combined with a delivery vehicle (e.g., liposomes) and/or excipients, such as carriers, diluents.
  • a delivery vehicle e.g., liposomes
  • excipients such as carriers, diluents.
  • Other agents such as preservatives and stabilizers can also be added.
  • Pharmaceutically acceptable salts or solvates of any of the nucleic acids of the invention are likewise within the scope of the present invention.
  • Methods for the delivery of nucleic acids are known in the art and within the knowledge of the person skilled in the art.
  • compositions disclosed herein are preferably pharmaceutical compositions. Such compositions are suitable for administration to a subject.
  • the composition comprises a conjugated nucleic acid disclosed herein, or a pharmaceutically acceptable salt or solvate thereof, and a solvent (preferably water) and/or a delivery vehicle and/or a physiologically acceptable excipient and/or a carrier and/or a salt and/or a diluent and/or a buffer and/or a preservative.
  • the composition comprises a plurality of conjugated nucleic acids disclosed herein, preferably a plurality of a single species of a conjugated nucleic acid disclosed herein.
  • the composition therefore comprises a plurality of the same conjugated nucleic acid.
  • composition is, or is essentially, stereopure
  • a composition that is stereopure is a composition in which all, or essentially all, of the components of the composition, such as conjugated nucleic acids, have the same stereochemical conformation in all, or essentially all, of their stereocentres. This can for example be achieved by replacing al the undefined stereocentres, such as phosphorothioate (PS) linkages by linkages that do not have a stereocentre, such as phosphodiester (PO) or phosphorodithioate (PS2) linkages.
  • PS phosphorothioate
  • PO phosphodiester
  • PS2 phosphorodithioate
  • a plurality is to be understood as two or more, three or more, four or more, five or more, 10 or more, 100 or more, but can also be understood as a very large number such as several thousands, several million, several billion or more.
  • “Essentially” in the context of this inventions is preferably to be understood as 70% or more, 75% or more, 80% or more, 85% or more, 90% or more, 95% or more, 96% or more, 97% or more, 98% or more, 99% or more, 99.5% or more, 99.6% or more, 99.7% or more, 99.8% or more, 99.9% or more, or 99.99% or more.
  • any degradation products, incomplete synthesis products or any other impurities are not to be counted.
  • Pharmaceutically acceptable carriers or diluents include those used in formulations suitable for oral, rectal, nasal or parenteral (including subcutaneous, intramuscular, intravenous, intradermal, and transdermal) administration.
  • the formulations may conveniently be presented in unit dosage form and may be prepared by any of the methods well known in the art of pharmacy.
  • Subcutaneous or transdermal modes of administration may be preferably suitable for the compounds described herein.
  • the therapeutically effective amount of a conjugated nucleic acid of the present invention will depend on the route of administration, the type of mammal being treated, and the physical characteristics of the specific mammal under consideration. These factors and their relationship to determining this amount are well known to skilled practitioners in the medical arts. This amount and the method of administration can be tailored to achieve optimal efficacy, and may depend on such factors as weight, diet, concurrent medication and other factors, well known to those skilled in the medical arts. The dosage sizes and dosing regimen most appropriate for human use may be guided by the results obtained by the present invention, and may be confirmed in properly designed clinical trials.
  • An effective dosage and treatment protocol may be determined by conventional means, starting with a low dose in laboratory animals and then increasing the dosage while monitoring the effects, and systematically varying the dosage regimen as well. Numerous factors may be taken into consideration by a clinician when determining an optimal dosage for a given subject. Such considerations are known to the skilled person.
  • Conjugated nucleic acids of the present invention, or salts thereof may be formulated as pharmaceutical compositions prepared for storage or administration, which typically comprise a therapeutically effective amount of a nucleic acid of the invention, or a salt thereof, in a pharmaceutically acceptable carrier.
  • the conjugated nucleic acids or compositions of the present invention can also be administered in combination with other therapeutic compounds, either administrated separately or simultaneously, e.g., as a combined unit dose.
  • the invention also includes a composition comprising one or more conjugated nucleic acids according to the present invention in a physiologically/pharmaceutically acceptable excipient, such as a stabilizer, preservative, diluent, buffer, and the like.
  • the composition comprises a conjugated nucleic acid disclosed herein and a further therapeutic agent selected from the group comprising an oligonucleotide, a small molecule, a monoclonal antibody, a polyclonal antibody, a peptide and a protein.
  • a conjugated nucleic acid of the invention with different sequences may be administered simultaneously or sequentially.
  • the present invention provides a composition, e.g., a pharmaceutical composition, comprising one or a combination of different conjugated nucleic acids of the invention and at least one pharmaceutically acceptable carrier.
  • a unit dose may contain between about 0.01 mg/kg and about 100 mg/kg body weight of conjugated nucleic acid.
  • the dose can be from 10 mg/kg to 25 mg/kg body weight, or 1 mg/kg to 10 mg/kg body weight, or 0.05 mg/kg to 5 mg/kg body weight, or 0.1 mg/kg to 5 mg/kg body weight, or 0.1 mg/kg to1 mg/kg body weight, or 0.1 mg/kg to 0.5 mg/kg body weight, or 0.5 mg/kg to 1 mg/kg body weight.
  • the dose can be from about 0.5 mg/kg to about 10 mg/kg body weight, or about 0.6 mg/kg to about 8 mg/kg body weight, or about 0.7 mg/kg to about 7 mg/kg body weight, or about 0.8 mg/kg to about 6 mg/kg body weight, or about 0.9 mg/kg to about 5.5 mg/kg body weight, or about 1 mg/kg to about 5 mg/kg body weight, or about 2 mg/kg to about 5 mg/kg body weight, or about 3 mg/kg to about 5 mg/kg body weight, or about 1 mg/kg body weight, or about 3 mg/kg body weight, or about 5 mg/kg body weight, wherein “about” is a deviation of up to 30%, preferably up to 20%, more preferably up to 10%, yet more preferably up to 5% and most preferably 0% from the indicated value. Dosage levels may also be calculated via other parameters such as, e.g., body surface area.
  • the dosage and frequency of administration may vary depending on whether the treatment is therapeutic or prophylactic (e.g., preventative), and may be adjusted during the course of treatment.
  • a relatively low dosage is administered at relatively infrequent intervals over a relatively long period of time. Some subjects may continue to receive treatment over their lifetime.
  • a relatively high dosage at relatively short intervals is sometimes required until progression of the disease is reduced or until the patient shows partial or complete amelioration of symptoms of disease. Thereafter, the patient may be switched to a suitable prophylactic dosing regimen.
  • compositions of the present invention may be varied so as to obtain an amount of the active ingredient which is effective to achieve the desired therapeutic response for a particular patient, composition, and mode of administration, without causing deleterious side effects to the subject or patient.
  • a selected dosage level will depend upon a variety of factors, such as pharmacokinetic factors, including the activity of the particular nucleic acid or composition employed, the route of administration, the time of administration, the rate of excretion of the particular nucleic acid being employed, the duration of the treatment, other drugs, compounds and/or materials used in combination with the particular compositions employed, the age, sex, weight, condition, general health and prior medical history of the subject or patient being treated, and similar factors well known in the medical arts.
  • factors such as pharmacokinetic factors, including the activity of the particular nucleic acid or composition employed, the route of administration, the time of administration, the rate of excretion of the particular nucleic acid being employed, the duration of the treatment, other drugs, compounds and/or materials used in combination with the particular compositions employed, the age, sex, weight, condition, general health and prior medical history of the subject or patient being treated, and similar factors well known in the medical arts.
  • the pharmaceutical composition may be a sterile injectable aqueous suspension or solution, or in a lyophilised form.
  • the pharmaceutical compositions can be in unit dosage form.
  • the composition is divided into unit doses containing appropriate quantities of the active component.
  • the unit dosage form can be a packaged preparation, the package containing discrete quantities of the preparations, for example, packeted tablets, capsules, and powders in vials or ampoules.
  • the unit dosage form can also be a capsule, cachet, or tablet itself, or it can be the appropriate number of any of these packaged forms. It may be provided in single dose injectable form, for example in the form of a pen.
  • Compositions may be formulated for any suitable route and means of administration.
  • compositions and medicaments of the present invention may be administered to a mammalian subject in a pharmaceutically effective dose.
  • the mammal may be selected from a human, a non-human primate, a simian or prosimian, a dog, a cat, a horse, cattle, a pig, a goat, a sheep, a mouse, a rat, a hamster, a hedgehog and a guinea pig, or other species of relevance.
  • compositions of the invention may be administered alone or in combination with one or more other therapeutic or diagnostic agents.
  • a combination therapy may include a conjugated nucleic acid of the present invention combined with at least one other therapeutic agent selected based on the particular patient, disease or condition to be treated.
  • other such agents include, inter alia, a therapeutically active small molecule or polypeptide, a single chain antibody, a classical antibody or fragment thereof, or a nucleic acid molecule which modulates gene expression of one or more additional genes, and similar modulating therapeutics which may complement or otherwise be beneficial in a therapeutic or prophylactic treatment regimen.
  • Pharmaceutical compositions are typically sterile and stable under the conditions of manufacture and storage.
  • the composition may be formulated as a solution, microemulsion, liposome, or other ordered structure suitable to high drug concentration.
  • the carrier may be a solvent or dispersion medium containing, for example, water, alcohol such as ethanol, polyol (e.g., glycerol, propylene glycol, and liquid polyethylene glycol), or any suitable mixtures.
  • the proper fluidity may be maintained, for example, by the use of a coating such as lecithin, by the maintenance of the required particle size in the case of dispersion and by use of surfactants according to formulation chemistry well known in the art.
  • isotonic agents e.g., sugars, polyalcohols such as mannitol, sorbitol, or sodium chloride may be desirable in the composition.
  • Prolonged absorption of injectable compositions may be brought about by including in the composition an agent that delays absorption for example, monostearate salts and gelatine.
  • One aspect of the invention is a conjugated nucleic acid or a composition disclosed herein for use as a medicament.
  • the conjugated nucleic acid or composition is preferably for use in the prevention, decrease of the risk of suffering from, or treatment of a disease that can be treated by decreasing the expression of the gene targeted by the nucleic acid.
  • Preventing, decreasing the risk of suffering from or treating a disease may mean that the underlying cause of the disease is being addressed. In such a case treatment with a conjugated nucleic acid or a composition disclose herein may lead to a cure. Preventing, decreasing the risk of suffering from or treating a disease may also be limited to at least partially alleviating or ameliorating one or more symptoms of the disease.
  • the present invention provides a conjugated nucleic acid for use, alone or in combination with one or more additional therapeutic agents in a pharmaceutical composition, for treatment or prophylaxis of conditions, diseases and disorders responsive to inhibition of the target gene that is targeted by the nucleic acid of the conjugated nucleic acid.
  • One aspect of the invention is the use of a nucleic acid or a composition as disclosed herein in the prevention, decrease of the risk of suffering from, or treatment of a disease that can be treated by decreasing the expression of the gene targeted by the nucleic acid.
  • One aspect of the invention is the use of a conjugated nucleic acid or a composition as disclosed herein in a method of inhibiting the expression the gene targeted by the nucleic acid in a cell, preferably in vitro.
  • One aspect of the invention is a method of inhibiting the expression of the gene targeted by a conjugated nucleic acid disclosed herein in a cell, preferably in vitro, comprising a step of administering a conjugated nucleic acid or a composition as disclosed herein to cells, preferably in vitro.
  • Conjugated nucleic acids and pharmaceutical compositions of the invention may be used in the treatment of a variety of conditions, disorders or diseases. Treatment with a conjugated nucleic acid or composition of the invention preferably leads to in vivo target gene mRNA and/or protein depletion, preferably in the liver. As such, conjugated nucleic acids of the invention, and compositions comprising them, will be useful in methods for treating a variety of pathological disorders in which inhibiting the expression of the target gene may be beneficial. Such methods comprise a step of administering to a subject in need thereof a therapeutically effective amount of a conjugated nucleic acid of the invention.
  • the invention thus provides methods of treatment or prevention of a disorder, the method comprising the step of administering to a subject (e.g., a patient) in need thereof a therapeutically effective amount of a conjugated nucleic acid or pharmaceutical composition comprising a conjugated nucleic acid of the invention.
  • the most desirable therapeutically effective amount is an amount that will produce a desired efficacy of a particular treatment selected by one of skill in the art for a given subject in need thereof. This amount will vary depending upon a variety of factors understood by the skilled worker, including but not limited to the characteristics of the therapeutic compound (including activity, pharmacokinetics, pharmacodynamics, and bioavailability), the physiological condition of the subject (including age, sex, disease type and stage, general physical condition, responsiveness to a given dosage, and type of medication), the nature of the pharmaceutically acceptable carrier or carriers in the formulation, and the route of administration.
  • conjugated nucleic acids and pharmaceutical compositions of the invention may be used to treat or prevent a disorder.
  • the present invention provides methods for treating disorder in a mammalian subject, such as a human, the method comprising the step of administering to a subject in need thereof a therapeutically effective amount of a conjugated nucleic acid or composition as disclosed herein.
  • Administration of a "therapeutically effective dosage" of a nucleic acid of the invention may result in a decrease in severity of disease symptoms, an increase in frequency and duration of disease symptom-free periods, or a prevention of impairment or disability due to the disease affliction.
  • Conjugated nucleic acids of the invention may be beneficial in treating or diagnosing a disorder that may be diagnosed or treated using the methods described herein. Treatment and diagnosis of disorders are also considered to fall within the scope of the present invention.
  • One aspect of the invention is a method of preventing, decreasing the risk of suffering from, or treating a disorder, comprising administering a pharmaceutically effective dose or amount of a conjugated nucleic acid or a composition disclosed herein to an individual in need of treatment, preferably wherein the nucleic acid or composition is administered to the subject subcutaneously, intravenously or by oral, rectal, pulmonary, intramuscular or intraperitoneal administration. Preferably, it is administered subcutaneously.
  • a conjugated nucleic acid or compositions disclosed herein may be for use in a regimen comprising treatments once or twice weekly, every week, every two weeks, every three weeks, every four weeks, every five weeks, every six weeks, every seven weeks, every eight weeks, every nine weeks, every ten weeks, every eleven weeks, every twelve weeks, every three months, every four months, every five months, every six months or in regimens with varying dosing frequency such as combinations of the before-mentioned intervals.
  • the conjugated nucleic acid or composition may be for use subcutaneously, intravenously or using any other application routes such as oral, rectal, pulmonary, intramuscular or intraperitoneal. Preferably, it is for use subcutaneously.
  • An exemplary treatment regime is administration once every two weeks, once every three weeks, once every four weeks, once a month, once every two or three months or once every three, four, five or six or more months. Dosages may be selected and readjusted by the skilled health care professional as required to maximize therapeutic benefit for a particular subject, e.g., patient.
  • the conjugated nucleic acids will typically be administered on multiple occasions. Intervals between single dosages can be, for example, 2-5 days, weekly, bi-weekly, monthly, every two or three months, every four or five months, every six months, or yearly. Intervals between administrations can also be irregular, based on nucleic acid target gene product levels for example in the liver of the subject or patient.
  • a conjugated nucleic acid or composition as disclosed herein in the manufacture of a medicament for treating a disorder.
  • a medicament is a pharmaceutical composition.
  • Also included in the invention is a method of treating or preventing a disorder, comprising administration of a composition comprising a conjugated nucleic acid or composition as described herein, to an individual in need of treatment (to improve such pathologies).
  • the conjugated nucleic acid or composition may be administered in a regimen comprising treatments twice every week, once every week, every two weeks, every three weeks, every four weeks, every five weeks, every six weeks, every seven weeks, or every eight to twelve or more weeks or in regimens with varying dosing frequency such as combinations of the before- mentioned intervals.
  • the conjugated nucleic acid or composition may be for use subcutaneously or intravenously or other application routes such as oral, rectal or intraperitoneal.
  • a conjugated nucleic acid or composition of the invention may be administered by any appropriate administration pathway known in the art, including but not limited to aerosol, enteral, nasal, ophthalmic, oral, parenteral, rectal, vaginal, or transdermal (e.g., topical administration of a cream, gel or ointment, or by means of a transdermal patch).
  • any appropriate administration pathway known in the art including but not limited to aerosol, enteral, nasal, ophthalmic, oral, parenteral, rectal, vaginal, or transdermal (e.g., topical administration of a cream, gel or ointment, or by means of a transdermal patch).
  • Parenteral administration is typically associated with injection at or in communication with the intended site of action, including infraorbital, infusion, intraarterial, intracapsular, intracardiac, intradermal, intramuscular, intraperitoneal, intrapulmonary, intraspinal, intrasternal, intrathecal, intrauterine, intravenous, subarachnoid, subcapsular, subcutaneous, transmucosal, or transtracheal administration.
  • infraorbital infusion, intraarterial, intracapsular, intracardiac, intradermal, intramuscular, intraperitoneal, intrapulmonary, intraspinal, intrasternal, intrathecal, intrauterine, intravenous, subarachnoid, subcapsular, subcutaneous, transmucosal, or transtracheal administration.
  • Solutions or suspensions used for intradermal or subcutaneous application typically include one or more of: a sterile diluent such as water for injection, saline solution, fixed oils, polyethylene glycols, glycerine, propylene glycol or other synthetic solvents; antibacterial agents such as benzyl alcohol or methyl parabens; antioxidants such as ascorbic acid or sodium bisulfite; chelating agents such as ethylenediaminetetraacetic acid; buffers such as acetates, citrates or phosphates; and/or tonicity adjusting agents such as, e.g., sodium chloride or dextrose.
  • a sterile diluent such as water for injection, saline solution, fixed oils, polyethylene glycols, glycerine, propylene glycol or other synthetic solvents
  • antibacterial agents such as benzyl alcohol or methyl parabens
  • antioxidants such as ascorbic acid or sodium bisulfite
  • chelating agents
  • the pH can be adjusted with acids or bases, such as hydrochloric acid or sodium hydroxide, or buffers with citrate, phosphate, acetate and the like.
  • acids or bases such as hydrochloric acid or sodium hydroxide, or buffers with citrate, phosphate, acetate and the like.
  • Such preparations may be enclosed in ampoules, disposable syringes or multiple dose vials made of glass or plastic.
  • Sterile injectable solutions may be prepared by incorporating a conjugated nucleic acid in the required amount in an appropriate solvent with one or a combination of ingredients described above, as required, followed by sterilization microfiltration.
  • Dispersions may be prepared by incorporating the active compound into a sterile vehicle that contains a dispersion medium and optionally other ingredients, such as those described above.
  • the methods of preparation are vacuum drying and freeze-drying (lyophilization) that yield a powder of the active ingredient in addition to any additional desired ingredient from a sterile-filtered solution thereof.
  • a therapeutically effective amount of a conjugated nucleic acid of the invention When a therapeutically effective amount of a conjugated nucleic acid of the invention is administered by, e.g., intravenous, cutaneous or subcutaneous injection, the nucleic acid will be in the form of a pyrogen-free, parenterally acceptable aqueous solution. Methods for preparing parenterally acceptable solutions, taking into consideration appropriate pH, isotonicity, stability, and the like, are within the skill in the art.
  • a preferred pharmaceutical composition for intravenous, cutaneous, or subcutaneous injection will contain, in addition to a nucleic acid, an isotonic vehicle such as sodium chloride injection, Ringer's injection, dextrose injection, dextrose and sodium chloride injection, lactated Ringer's injection, or other vehicle as known in the art.
  • a pharmaceutical composition of the present invention may also contain stabilizers, preservatives, buffers, antioxidants, or other additives well known to those of skill in the art.
  • the amount of conjugated nucleic acid which can be combined with a carrier material to produce a single dosage form will vary depending on a variety of factors, including the subject being treated, and the particular mode of administration. In general, it will be an amount of the composition that produces an appropriate therapeutic effect under the particular circumstances. Generally, out of one hundred percent, this amount will range from about 0.01% to about 99% of nucleic acid, from about 0.1% to about 70%, or from about 1% to about 30% of nucleic acid in combination with a pharmaceutically acceptable carrier.
  • the conjugated nucleic acid may be prepared with carriers that will protect the compound against rapid release, such as a controlled release formulation, including implants, transdermal patches, and microencapsulated delivery systems.
  • a controlled release formulation including implants, transdermal patches, and microencapsulated delivery systems.
  • Biodegradable, biocompatible polymers can be used, such as ethylene vinyl acetate, polyanhydrides, polyglycolic acid, collagen, polyorthoesters, and polylactic acid. Many methods for the preparation of such formulations are patented or generally known to those skilled in the art. See, e.g., Sustained and Controlled Release Drug Delivery Systems, J. R. Robinson, ed., Marcel Dekker, Inc., New York, 1978.
  • Dosage regimens may be adjusted to provide the optimum desired response (e.g., a therapeutic response). For example, a dose may be administered, several divided doses may be administered over time, or the dose may be proportionally reduced or increased as indicated by the particular circumstances of the therapeutic situation, on a case by case basis. It is especially advantageous to formulate parenteral compositions in dosage unit forms for ease of administration and uniformity of dosage when administered to the subject or patient.
  • a dosage unit form refers to physically discrete units suitable as unitary dosages for the subjects to be treated; each unit containing a predetermined quantity of active compound calculated to produce a desired therapeutic effect.
  • the specification for the dosage unit forms of the invention depend on the specific characteristics of the active compound and the particular therapeutic effect(s) to be achieved and the treatment and sensitivity of any individual patient.
  • conjugated nucleic acid or composition of the present invention can be produced using routine methods in the art including chemical synthesis, such as solid phase chemical synthesis.
  • Conjugated nucleic acids or compositions of the invention may be administered with one or more of a variety of medical devices known in the art.
  • a nucleic acid of the invention may be administered with a needleless hypodermic injection device.
  • implants and modules useful in the present invention are in the art, including e.g., implantable micro-infusion pumps for controlled rate delivery; devices for administering through the skin; infusion pumps for delivery at a precise infusion rate; variable flow implantable infusion devices for continuous drug delivery; and osmotic drug delivery systems. These and other such implants, delivery systems, and modules are known to those skilled in the art.
  • the conjugated nucleic acid or composition of the invention may be formulated to ensure a desired distribution in vivo.
  • a therapeutic compound or composition of the invention to a particular in vivo location, they can be formulated, for example, in liposomes which may comprise one or more moieties that are selectively transported into specific cells or organs, thus enhancing targeted drug delivery.
  • the invention is characterized by high specificity at the molecular and tissue-directed delivery level.
  • the sequences of the conjugated nucleic acids of the invention are highly specific for their target, meaning that they do not inhibit the expression of genes that they are not designed to target or only minimally inhibit the expression of genes that they are not designed to target and/or only inhibit the expression of a low number of genes that they are not designed to target.
  • a further level of specificity is achieved when nucleic acids are linked to a ligand that is specifically recognised and internalised by a particular cell type. This is for example the case when a nucleic acid is linked to a ligand comprising GalNAc moieties, which are specifically recognised and internalised by hepatocytes.
  • the present invention thus provides nucleic acids of the invention linked to a ligand comprising one or more GalNAc moieties, or comprising one or more other moieties that confer cell-type or tissue-specific internalisation of the nucleic acid thereby conferring additional specificity of target gene knockdown by RNA interference.
  • the conjugated nucleic acid as described herein may be formulated with a lipid in the form of a liposome. Such a formulation may be described in the art as a lipoplex.
  • the composition with a lipid/liposome may be used to assist with delivery of the conjugated nucleic acid of the invention to the target cells.
  • the lipid delivery system herein described may be used as an alternative to a conjugated ligand or in addition.
  • Such a lipoplex may comprise a lipid composition comprising: i) a cationic lipid, or a pharmaceutically acceptable salt thereof; ii) a steroid; iii) a phosphatidylethanolamine phospholipid; and/or iv) a PEGylated lipid.
  • the cationic lipid may be an amino cationic lipid.
  • the content of the cationic lipid component may be from about 55 mol% to about 65 mol% of the overall lipid content of the composition.
  • the cationic lipid component is about 59 mol% of the overall lipid content of the composition.
  • compositions can further comprise a steroid.
  • the steroid may be cholesterol.
  • the content of the steroid may be from about 26 mol% to about 35 mol% of the overall lipid content of the lipid composition. More preferably, the content of steroid may be about 30 mol% of the overall lipid content of the lipid composition.
  • the phosphatidylethanolamine phospholipid may be selected from the group consisting of 1,2- diphytanoyl-sn-glycero-3-phosphoethanolamine (DPhyPE), 1 ,2-dioleoyl-sn-glycero-3- phosphoethanolamine (DOPE), 1,2-distearoyl-sn-glycero-3-phosphoethanolamine (DSPE),
  • DPhyPE 1,2- diphytanoyl-sn-glycero-3-phosphoethanolamine
  • DOPE 1,2-dioleoyl-sn-glycero-3- phosphoethanolamine
  • DSPE 1,2-distearoyl-sn-glycero-3-phosphoethanolamine
  • DLPE 1.2-Dilauroyl-sn-glycero-3-phosphoethanolamine
  • DMPE 1,2-Dimyristoyl-sn-glycero-3- phosphoethanolamine
  • DPPE 1,2-Dipalmitoyl-sn-glycero-3-phosphoethanolamine
  • DLoPE 1.2-Dilinoleoyl-sn-glycero-3-phosphoethanolamine
  • POPE 1-Palmitoyl-2-oleoyl-sn-glycero- 3-phosphoethanolamine
  • DEPE 1,2-Dierucoyl-sn-glycero-3-phosphoethanolamine
  • DSQPE 1.2-Disqualeoyl-sn-glycero-3-phosphoethanolamine
  • SLPE 1-Stearoyl-2-linoleoyl-sn- glycero-3-phosphoethanolamine
  • the content of the phospholipid may be about 10 mol% of the overall lipid content of the composition.
  • the PEGylated lipid may be selected from the group consisting of 1,2-dimyristoyl-sn-glycerol, methoxypolyethylene glycol (DMG-PEG) and C16-Ceramide-PEG.
  • the content of the PEGylated lipid may be about 1 to 5 mol% of the overall lipid content of the composition.
  • the content of the cationic lipid component in the composition may be from about 55 mol% to about 65 mol% of the overall lipid content of the lipid composition, preferably about 59 mol% of the overall lipid content of the lipid composition.
  • the composition may have a molar ratio of the components of i):ii): iii): iv) selected from 55:34:10:1; 56:33:10:1; 57:32:10:1; 58:31:10:1 ; 59:30:10:1; 60:29:10:1 ; 61:28:10:1; 62:27:10:1; 63:26:10:1; 64:25:10:1 ; and 65:24:10:1.
  • Neutral liposome compositions may be formed from, for example, dimyristoyl phosphatidylcholine (DMPC) or dipalmitoyl phosphatidylcholine (DPPC).
  • Anionic liposome compositions may be formed from dimyristoyl phosphatidylglycerol, while anionic fusogenic liposomes may be formed primarily from dioleoyl phosphatidylethanolamine (DOPE).
  • Another type of liposomal composition may be formed from phosphatidylcholine (PC) such as, for example, soybean PC, and egg PC. Another type is formed from mixtures of phospholipid and/or phosphatidylcholine and/or cholesterol.
  • a positively charged synthetic cationic lipid, N-[1-(2,3-dioleyloxy)propyl]-N,N,N- trimethylammonium chloride can be used to form small liposomes that interact spontaneously with nucleic acid to form lipid-nucleic acid complexes which are capable of fusing with the negatively charged lipids of the cell membranes of tissue culture cells.
  • DOTMA analogues can also be used to form liposomes.
  • lipids described herein may also be used to form liposomes.
  • a liposome containing a conjugated nucleic acid can be prepared by a variety of methods.
  • the lipid component of a liposome is dissolved in a detergent so that micelles are formed with the lipid component.
  • the lipid component can be an amphipathic cationic lipid or lipid conjugate.
  • the detergent can have a high critical micelle concentration and may be nonionic. Exemplary detergents include cholate, CHAPS, octylglucoside, deoxycholate, and lauroyl sarcosine.
  • the conjugated nucleic acid preparation is then added to the micelles that include the lipid component.
  • the cationic groups on the lipid interact with the nucleic acid and condense around the nucleic acid to form a liposome. After condensation, the detergent is removed, e.g., by dialysis, to yield a liposomal preparation of conjugated nucleic acid.
  • a carrier compound that assists in condensation can be added during the condensation reaction, e.g., by controlled addition.
  • the carrier compound can be a polymer other than a conjugated nucleic acid (e.g., spermine or spermidine). pH can also be adjusted to favour condensation.
  • Conjugated nucleic acid formulations of the present invention may include a surfactant.
  • the conjugated nucleic acid is formulated as an emulsion that includes a surfactant.
  • a surfactant that is not ionized is a non-ionic surfactant.
  • non-ionic esters such as ethylene glycol esters, propylene glycol esters, glyceryl esters etc., nonionic alkanolamides, and ethers such as fatty alcohol ethoxylates, propoxylated alcohols, and ethoxylated/propoxylated block polymers.
  • a surfactant that carries a negative charge when dissolved or dispersed in water is an anionic surfactant.
  • Examples include carboxylates, such as soaps, acyl lactylates, acyl amides of amino acids, esters of sulfuric acid such as alkyl sulfates and ethoxylated alkyl sulfates, sulfonates such as alkyl benzene sulfonates, acyl isethionates, acyl taurates and sulfosuccinates, and phosphates.
  • carboxylates such as soaps, acyl lactylates, acyl amides of amino acids, esters of sulfuric acid such as alkyl sulfates and ethoxylated alkyl sulfates, sulfonates such as alkyl benzene sulfonates, acyl isethionates, acyl taurates and sulfosuccinates, and phosphates.
  • a surfactant that carries a positive charge when dissolved or dispersed in water is a cationic surfactant.
  • examples include quaternary ammonium salts and ethoxylated amines.
  • a surfactant that has the ability to carry either a positive or negative charge is an amphoteric surfactant.
  • amphoteric surfactant examples include acrylic acid derivatives, substituted alkylamides, N-alkylbetaines and phosphatides.
  • Micelles are defined herein as a particular type of molecular assembly in which amphipathic molecules are arranged in a spherical structure such that all the hydrophobic portions of the molecules are directed inward, leaving the hydrophilic portions in contact with the surrounding aqueous phase. The converse arrangement exists if the environment is hydrophobic.
  • a micelle may be formed by mixing an aqueous solution of the nucleic acid, an alkali metal alkyl sulphate, and at least one micelle forming compound.
  • Exemplary micelle forming compounds include lecithin, hyaluronic acid, pharmaceutically acceptable salts of hyaluronic acid, glycolic acid, lactic acid, chamomile extract, cucumber extract, oleic acid, linoleic acid, linolenic acid, monoolein, monooleates, monolaurates, borage oil, evening of primrose oil, menthol, trihydroxy oxo cholanyl glycine and pharmaceutically acceptable salts thereof, glycerol, polyglycerol, lysine, polylysine, triolein, polyoxyethylene ethers and analogues thereof, polidocanol alkyl ethers and analogues thereof, chenodeoxycholate, deoxycholate, and mixtures thereof.
  • Phenol and/or m-cresol may be added to the mixed micellar composition to act as a stabiliser and preservative.
  • An isotonic agent such as glycerine may as be added.
  • a conjugated nucleic acid preparation may be incorporated into a particle such as a microparticle.
  • Microparticles can be produced by spray-drying, lyophilisation, evaporation, fluid bed drying, vacuum drying, or a combination of these methods. Definitions
  • the terms “inhibit”, “down-regulate”, or “reduce” with respect to gene expression mean that the expression of the gene, or the level of RNA molecules or equivalent RNA molecules encoding one or more proteins or protein subunits (e.g., mRNA), or the activity of one or more proteins or protein subunits, is reduced below that observed either in the absence of the nucleic acid or conjugated nucleic acid of the invention or as compared to that obtained with an siRNA molecule with no known homology to the human transcript (herein termed non-silencing control). Such control may be conjugated and modified in an analogous manner to the molecule of the invention and delivered into the target cell by the same route.
  • the expression after treatment with the nucleic acid of the invention may be reduced to 95%, 90%, 80%, 70%, 60%, 50%, 40%, 30%, 20%, 15%, 10%, 5% or 0% or to intermediate values, or less than that observed in the absence of the nucleic acid or conjugated nucleic acid.
  • the expression may be measured in the cells to which the nucleic acid is applied.
  • the level can, if applicable, be measured in a different group of cells or in a tissue or an organ or in a body fluid such as blood or plasma.
  • the level of inhibition is preferably measured in conditions that have been selected because they show the greatest effect of the nucleic acid on the target mRNA level in cells treated with the nucleic acid in vitro.
  • the level of inhibition may for example be measured after 24 hours or 48 hours of treatment with a nucleic acid at a concentration of between 0.038 nM - 10 mM, preferably 1 nM, 10 nM or 100 nM.
  • These conditions may be different for different nucleic acid sequences or for different types of nucleic acids, such as for nucleic acids that are unmodified or modified or conjugated to a ligand or not. Examples of suitable conditions for determining levels of inhibition are described in the examples.
  • nucleic acid it is meant a nucleic acid comprising two strands comprising nucleotides, that is able to interfere with gene expression. Inhibition may be complete or partial and results in down regulation of gene expression in a targeted manner.
  • the nucleic acid comprises two separate polynucleotide strands; the first strand, which may also be a guide strand; and a second strand, which may also be a passenger strand.
  • the first strand and the second strand may be part of the same polynucleotide molecule that is self-complementary which 'folds' back to form a double-stranded molecule.
  • the nucleic acid may be an siRNA molecule.
  • the nucleic acid may comprise ribonucleotides, modified ribonucleotides, deoxynucleotides, deoxyribonucleotides, or nucleotide analogues non-nucleotides that are able to mimic nucleotides such that they may 'pair' with the corresponding base on the target sequence or complementary strand.
  • the nucleic acid may further comprise a double-stranded nucleic acid portion or duplex region formed by all or a portion of the first strand (also known in the art as a guide strand) and all or a portion of the second strand (also known in the art as a passenger strand).
  • the duplex region is defined as beginning with the first base pair formed between the first strand and the second strand and ending with the last base pair formed between the first strand and the second strand, inclusive.
  • duplex region it is meant the region in two complementary or substantially complementary oligonucleotides that form base pairs with one another, either by Watson-Crick base pairing or any other manner that allows for a duplex between oligonucleotide strands that are complementary or substantially complementary.
  • an oligonucleotide strand having 21 nucleotide units can base pair with another oligonucleotide of 21 nucleotide units, yet only 19 nucleotides on each strand are complementary or substantially complementary, such that the “duplex region” consists of 19 base pairs.
  • the remaining base pairs may exist as 5' and 3' overhangs, or as single-stranded regions.
  • ⁇ complementarity refers to complementarity between the strands such that they are capable of annealing under biological conditions. Techniques to empirically determine if two strands are capable of annealing under biological conditions are well known in the art. Alternatively, two strands can be synthesised and added together under biological conditions to determine if they anneal to one another. The portion of the first strand and second strand that forms at least one duplex region may be fully complementary and is at least partially complementary to each other. Depending on the length of a nucleic acid, a perfect match in terms of base complementarity between the first strand and the second strand is not necessarily required. However, the first and second strands must be able to hybridise under physiological conditions.
  • non-pairing nucleotide analogue means a nucleotide analogue which includes a non-base pairing moiety including but not limited to: 6 des amino adenosine (Nebularine), 4-Me-indole, 3-nitropyrrole, 5-nitroindole, Ds, Pa, N3-Me ribo U, N3-Me riboT, N3-Me dC, N3-Me-dT, N1-Me-dG, N1-Me-dA, N3-ethyl-dC, and N3-Me dC.
  • the non-base pairing nucleotide analogue is a ribonucleotide. In other embodiments it is a deoxyribonucleotide.
  • terminal functional group includes without limitation a halogen, alcohol, amine, carboxylic, ester, amide, aldehyde, ketone, and ether groups.
  • An “overhang” as used herein has its normal and customary meaning in the art, i.e. a single- stranded portion of a nucleic acid that extends beyond the terminal nucleotide of a complementary strand in a double-strand nucleic acid.
  • blunt end includes double- stranded nucleic acid whereby both strands terminate at the same position, regardless of whether the terminal nucleotide(s) are base-paired.
  • the terminal nucleotide of a first strand and a second strand at a blunt end may be base paired.
  • the terminal nucleotide of a first strand and a second strand at a blunt end may not be paired.
  • the terminal two nucleotides of a first strand and a second strand at a blunt end may be base-paired.
  • the terminal two nucleotides of a first strand and a second strand at a blunt end may not be paired.
  • patient may be used interchangeably and refer to either a human or a non-human animal. These terms include mammals such as humans, primates, livestock animals (e.g., bovines, porcine), companion animals (e.g., canines, felines) and rodents (e.g., mice and rats).
  • livestock animals e.g., bovines, porcine
  • companion animals e.g., canines, felines
  • rodents e.g., mice and rats.
  • treating or “treatment” and grammatical variants thereof refer to an approach for obtaining beneficial or desired clinical results.
  • the term may refer to slowing the onset or rate of development of a condition, disorder or disease, reducing or alleviating symptoms associated with it, generating a complete or partial regression of the condition, or some combination of any of the above.
  • beneficial or desired clinical results include, but are not limited to, reduction or alleviation of symptoms, diminishment of extent of disease, stabilization (i.e., not worsening) of state of disease, delay or slowing of disease progression, amelioration or palliation of the disease state, and remission (whether partial or total), whether detectable or undetectable.
  • Treatment can also mean prolonging survival relative to expected survival time if not receiving treatment.
  • a subject e.g., a human
  • treatment includes inhibition or reduction of an increase in severity of a pathological state or symptoms relative to the absence of treatment, and is not necessarily meant to imply complete cessation of the relevant disease, disorder or condition.
  • prevention refers to an approach for preventing the development of, or altering the pathology of, a condition, disease or disorder.
  • prevention may refer to prophylactic or preventive measures.
  • beneficial or desired clinical results include, but are not limited to, prevention or slowing of symptoms, progression or development of a disease, whether detectable or undetectable.
  • a subject e.g., a human
  • prevention includes slowing the onset of disease relative to the absence of treatment, and is not necessarily meant to imply permanent prevention of the relevant disease, disorder or condition.
  • preventing or “prevention” of a condition may in certain contexts refer to reducing the risk of developing the condition, or preventing or delaying the development of symptoms associated with the condition.
  • an “effective amount,” “therapeutically effective amount” or “effective dose” is an amount of a composition (e.g., a therapeutic composition or agent) that produces at least one desired therapeutic effect in a subject, such as preventing or treating a target condition or beneficially alleviating a symptom associated with the condition.
  • the term “pharmaceutically acceptable salt” refers to a salt that is not harmful to a patient or subject to which the salt in question is administered. It may be a salt chosen, e.g., among acid addition salts and basic salts. Examples of acid addition salts include chloride salts, citrate salts and acetate salts.
  • Examples of basic salts include salts wherein the cation is selected from alkali metal cations, such as sodium or potassium ions, alkaline earth metal cations, such as calcium or magnesium ions, as well as substituted ammonium ions, such as ions of the type N(R 1 )(R 2 )(R 3 )(R 4 ) + , wherein R 1 , R 2 , R 3 and R 4 independently will typically designate hydrogen, optionally substituted C1 -6-alkyl groups or optionally substituted C2-6- alkenyl groups. Examples of relevant C1 -6-alkyl groups include methyl, ethyl, 1 -propyl and 2- propyl groups.
  • C2-6-alkenyl groups of possible relevance include ethenyl, 1- propenyl and 2-propenyl.
  • Other examples of pharmaceutically acceptable salts are described in “Remington’s Pharmaceutical Sciences”, 17th edition, Alfonso R. Gennaro (Ed.), Mark Publishing Company, Easton, PA, USA, 1985 (and more recent editions thereof), in the “Encyclopaedia of Pharmaceutical Technology”, 3rd edition, James Swarbrick (Ed.), Informa Healthcare USA (Inc.), NY, USA, 2007, and in J. Pharm. Sci. 66: 2 (1977).
  • a "pharmaceutically acceptable salt” retains qualitatively a desired biological activity of the parent compound without imparting any undesired effects relative to the compound.
  • Acid addition salts include salts derived from nontoxic inorganic acids, such as hydrochloric, nitric, phosphorous, phosphoric, sulfuric, hydrobromic, hydroiodic and the like, or from nontoxic organic acids such as aliphatic mono- and di-carboxylic acids, phenyl-substituted alkanoic acids, hydroxy alkanoic acids, aromatic acids, aliphatic and aromatic sulfonic acids and the like.
  • nontoxic inorganic acids such as hydrochloric, nitric, phosphorous, phosphoric, sulfuric, hydrobromic, hydroiodic and the like
  • nontoxic organic acids such as aliphatic mono- and di-carboxylic acids, phenyl-substituted alkanoic acids, hydroxy alkanoic acids, aromatic acids, aliphatic and aromatic sulfonic acids and the like.
  • Base addition salts include salts derived from alkaline earth metals, such as sodium, potassium, magnesium, calcium and the like, as well as from nontoxic organic amines, such as N, N'-dibenzylethylenediamine, N-methylglucamine, chloroprocaine, choline, diethanolamine, ethylenediamine, procaine and the like.
  • pharmaceutically acceptable carrier includes any of the standard pharmaceutical carriers. Pharmaceutically acceptable carriers for therapeutic use are well known in the pharmaceutical art, and are described, for example, in Remington's Pharmaceutical Sciences, Mack Publishing Co. (A. R. Gennaro edit. 1985). For example, sterile saline and phosphate- buffered saline at slightly acidic or physiological pH may be used.
  • Exemplary pH buffering agents include phosphate, citrate, acetate, tris/hydroxymethyl)aminomethane (TRIS), N- Tris(hydroxymethyl)methyl-3-aminopropanesulphonic acid (TAPS), ammonium bicarbonate, diethanolamine, histidine, which is a preferred buffer, arginine, lysine, or acetate or mixtures thereof.
  • TIS tris/hydroxymethyl)aminomethane
  • TAPS N- Tris(hydroxymethyl)methyl-3-aminopropanesulphonic acid
  • ammonium bicarbonate diethanolamine
  • histidine which is a preferred buffer
  • arginine arginine
  • lysine lysine
  • a "pharmaceutically acceptable carrier” includes any and all physiologically acceptable, i.e., compatible, solvents, dispersion media, coatings, antimicrobial agents, isotonic and absorption delaying agents, and the like.
  • the carrier is suitable for intravenous, intramuscular, subcutaneous, parenteral, spinal or epidermal administration (e.g., by injection or infusion).
  • the nucleic acid may be coated in a material or materials intended to protect the compound from the action of acids and other natural inactivating conditions to which the nucleic acid may be exposed when administered to a subject by a particular route of administration.
  • solvate in the context of the present invention refers to a complex of defined stoichiometry formed between a solute (in casu, a nucleic acid compound or pharmaceutically acceptable salt thereof according to the invention) and a solvent.
  • the solvent in this connection may, for example, be water or another pharmaceutically acceptable, typically small-molecular organic species, such as, but not limited to, acetic acid or lactic acid.
  • a solvate is normally referred to as a hydrate.
  • Figure 1 shows a possible synthesis flow diagram of an exemplary conjugated nucleic acid, comprising a phosphorodithioate (PS2) -containing trivalent GalNAc ligand conjugate to an oligonucleotide via a phosphorodithioate (PS2) linkage.
  • PS2 phosphorodithioate
  • PS2 phosphorodithioate
  • Figure 2 shows the UV traces of AEX-HPLC analyses at 25°C of several nucleic acid strands.
  • Fully stereodefined single stranded oligonucleotides ODN001 A and ODN005B result in narrow single peak signals ( Figures 2A and 2B).
  • Figure 3 mRNA levels of AT3 in murine primary hepatocytes after treatment with ODN001, ODN002, ODN003, ODN004, and ODN005 at various concentration (0.13 pM - 100 nM)
  • Serum stability gel 4 including ODN001 , ODN002, ODN003, and ODN004.
  • FIG. 5 Serum stability gel 4 ODN005.
  • FIG. 7 Tritosome stability gel 1 including ODN003, ODN004 and ODN005
  • Example compounds were synthesised according to methods described below and methods known to the person skilled in the art. Assembly of the oligonucleotide chain and linker building blocks was performed by solid phase synthesis applying phosphoramidite methodology.
  • ST23-phos Synthesis of thiophosphoramidite derivatives of ST41-(ps2) (ST41-S-phos) as well as ST23- (ps2) (ST23-S-phos) are described in Examples 2 and 3 below:
  • Oligonucleotides All Oligonucleotides were synthesized on an AKTA oligopilot synthesizer using standard phosphoramidite chemistry. Commercially available solid support and 2’-OMe nucleotide phosphoramidites, 2’-F nucleotide phosphoramidites (all standard protection. ChemGenes. LinkTech) and thiophosphoramidites (Symeres) were used according to the manufacturers recommended procedures.
  • Ancillary reagents were purchased from EMP Biotech. Synthesis was performed using a 0.1 M solution of the phosphoramidite in dry acetonitrile and benzylthiotetrazole (BTT) was used as activator (0.3M in acetonitrile). Coupling time was 10 min. Thiophosphoramidites were coupled using a couple/wash/couple cycle over a period of 60 min. A Cap/OX/Cap or Cap/Thio/Cap cycle was applied (Cap: Ac 2 0/NMI/Lutidine/Acetonitrile. Oxidizer: 0.1M I2 in pyridine/hhO).
  • Phosphorothioates (PS) and phosphorodithioates (PS2) were introduced using 0.05M DDTT (Chemgenes. ((dimethylamino-methylidene) amino)-3H-1.2.4-dithiazoline-3-thione). All other reagents and solvents were commercially available and used in standard reagent quality. DMT cleavage was achieved by treatment with 3% dichloroacetic acid in toluene. Upon completion of the programmed synthesis cycles a diethylamine (DEA) wash was performed. All oligonucleotides were synthesized in DMT-off mode. All single stranded oligonucleotides were synthesized according to the reaction conditions described above.
  • An exemplary synthesis flow diagram for a conjugated oligonucleotide with phosphorodithioate (PS2) linkages can be found in Figure 1.
  • the single strands were cleaved off the CPG by 40% aq. methylamine treatment.
  • the resulting crude oligonucleotide was purified by ion exchange chromatography (SourceQ. 7.5 ml_. GE Healthcare) on an AKTA Pure HPLC System using a sodium bromide gradient. Product containing fractions were pooled, desalted on a size exclusion column (Zetadex. EMP Biotech) and lyophilised.
  • Triethylamine (30 ml) was added and the mixture was concentrated under reduced pressure to obtain a colourless oil.
  • Thin layer chromatography indicated complete consumption of the starting material.
  • the crude product was divided over 4 batches and purified by flash column chromatography (injected as a solution in DCM + 1% Et 3 N, elution heptane (+1% Et 3 N), 10%-40% ethyl acetate (+ 1% Et 3 N)). Product containing fractions were combined, Et 3 N (5 ml) was added and concentrated under reduced pressure to obtain 14 g (36% yield) of ST41-S-phos.
  • Triethylamine (20 ml) was added and the mixture was concentrated under reduced pressure to obtain a colourless oil.
  • the residue was dissolved in toluene (60 ml_) and triethylamine (20 ml_) was added.
  • the solution was slowly pipetted into 750 ml_ of vigorously stirred heptane giving a turbid solution and a sticky oil at the bottom of the flask. All the solvents were decanted, the sticky oil was washed with pentane (2x).
  • the solvents were decanted again, re-dissolved in MeCN and finally concentrated under reduced pressure, co-evaporated with Et ⁇ D and dried overnight under reduced pressure to obtain 6 g (58% yield) of ST23-S-phos.
  • Example 6 in vivo activity
  • EDTA- plasma samples were retrieved by retro orbital bleeding at 7 days before treatment for baseline, day 1, 8, 15, 29, and 43 post treatment. At day 43 post treatment, the mice were sacrificed, and liver and kidneys were harvested. Plasma AT3 concentrations were analyzed with an Antithrombin III (SERPINC1) Mouse ELISA Kit (abeam ab108800). Liver AT3 mRNA levels were quantified by AACt analysis by Multiplex TaqMan quantification against house keeping gene expression (ApoB and actin).
  • AT3 serum levels correlate with liver mRNA levels, providing an indirect readout without a need of liver biopsies (Sehgal et al., 2015) allowing a monitoring of the siRNA mediated knockdown over time.
  • As baseline levels plasma samples from 7 days before injection were used for normalization.
  • Naturally occurring DNA and RNA molecules do not have any undefined stereocentres and are therefore stereopure, even when many copies of a same molecule are present in a composition. However, such molecules often cannot be used as therapeutic agents because they are prone to degradation in the environments in which they are to be used (e.g., in blood). Chemical modifications are therefore used to protect therapeutic nucleic acids from enzymatic degradation and allow their use as therapeutic agents.
  • One commonly used modification is the substitution of naturally occurring phosphodiester (PO) linkages to phosphorothioate (PS) linkages. This is most easily done in nucleic acid solid phase synthesis, by use of a sulfurization reagent during the P(lll) -> P(V) oxidation cycle.
  • a composition comprising many copies of a single nucleic acid comprising a number (n) of phosphorothioate (PS) modifications that are not stereodefined will in fact comprise 2 n diastereomers of the nucleic acid.
  • Diastereomers differ in chemical and physical properties. Thus, they often have different retention times during purification and analysis by HPLC. This is especially the case for preparative HPLC purification conditions of nucleic acids for medical use, as they should be performed at room temperature in mild conditions.
  • Anion exchange chromatography is best suited for such a process, as aqueous buffers with a Na + -gradient with a low content of organic cosolvent can be used. Under these conditions, the complex mixture of diastereomeric mixtures can have an extreme impact on the peak shape and peak multiplicity. As most of the unwanted impurities share the same undefined stereocentres, they are also present in sets of diastereomers. Thus, separational power of the purification method can be strongly impaired.
  • ODN001A is the fully stereodefined antisense strand of siRNAs ODN001- ODN005.
  • ODN005B is the fully stereodefined conjugated sense strand of siRNA ODN005.
  • Metabolic stabilisation of both of these strands is increased through the use of phosphorodithioate (PS2) internucleotide linkages in both strands, as well as in the triantennary GalNAc ligand and between the ligand and the nucleic acid for the sense strand.
  • PS2 phosphorodithioate
  • the major product for both of these strands is stereopure, as all their stereocentres are stereodefined. Accordingly, both compounds form a narrow single peak in the HPLC analysis. This would likely lead to enhanced resolution power in a large scale preparative HPLC purification.

Abstract

The invention relates to nucleic acids that are conjugated to a ligand, wherein the ligand comprises a phosphorodithioate (PS2) and/or is linked to the nucleic acid via a phosphorodithioate (PS2) linkage. Such conjugated nucleic acids can be used to inhibit gene expression. The invention further relates to therapeutic uses of such conjugated nucleic acids.

Description

Conjugated nucleic acids comprising a phosphorodithioate for inhibiting gene expression in a cell
Field of the invention
The invention relates to nucleic acids that are conjugated to a ligand, wherein the ligand comprises a phosphorodithioate (PS2) and/or is linked to the nucleic acid via a phosphorodithioate (PS2) linkage. Such conjugated nucleic acids can be used to inhibit gene expression. The invention further relates to therapeutic uses of such conjugated nucleic acids.
Background
Inhibitory nucleic acids such as siRNAs and antisense oligonucleotides (ASOs) are short nucleic acids that inhibit the formation of proteins by causing targeted degradation of the mRNA molecules that encode these proteins. Such gene silencing agents are becoming increasingly important for therapeutic applications in medicine. For the pharmaceutical development of such nucleic acids, it is among others necessary that they can be synthesised economically, are metabolically stable, are specifically targeted to a tissue, are able to enter cells and function within acceptable limits of toxicity.
One of the key requirements for the use of inhibitory nucleic acids in medical applications is metabolic stability of the nucleic acids and any ligand they are conjugated to. This is mostly achieved through chemical modifications. One commonly used modification is the replacement of metabolically relatively labile phosphodiester (PO) linkages through more stable phosphorothioate (PS) linkages. The downside of using phosphorothioate (PS) linkages however is that they are in general not stereodefined in solid phase synthesis, in which case each phosphorothioate (PS) modification can be present in the S- or R-form in the final molecule. The use of such linkages in nucleic acids or ligands leads to a mix of stereochemically different molecules in the final product (for example, a number of siRNAs will have a phosphorothioate in the S-form at a given position, and others will have a phosphorothioate in the R-form). With each additional phosphorothioate (PS) that is not stereodefined in a product, the number of possible stereochemical forms of the resulting product are multiplied by two. This in turn leads to higher complexity of compositions comprising such products, as they in fact comprise a mix of products with different stereochemical conformations. This increased complexity can have negative effects on downstream processes, such as purification of the drug product, and creates uncertainty in clinical development, as it is not certain whether each of the forms of the product is as potent as the others. Further, the increase of the number of phosphorothioates (PS) within a nucleic acid has been described to correlate with unintended effects, such as increased protein binding and toxicity. As a result, achieving high efficacy of an inhibitory nucleic acid while at the same time maintaining a good safety profile but also ease of synthesis and purification remains a challenge in the industry.
The inventors have surprisingly found that at least some of the phosphodiesters (PO) and phosphorothioate (PS) linkages commonly used in inhibitory nucleic acids and/or in ligands attached to such nucleic acids and/or in the linkage between the nucleic acid and the ligand, can safely be replaced by phosphorodithioates (PS2). Such substitutions have the potential to provide nucleic acids with ligands that are as stable as their counterparts with phosphorothioates (PS) in the same positions, but with fewer or no undefined stereocentres. This could lead to drug products that are just as potent, but simpler and/or more economical to synthesise, characterise and/or purify.
Summary of the invention
One aspect of the invention is a conjugated nucleic acid for inhibiting expression of a target gene, wherein the nucleic acid is conjugated to a ligand, wherein:
(i) the ligand comprises a phosphorodithioate (PS2); and/or
(ii) the nucleic acid is conjugated to the ligand via a phosphorodithioate (PS2) linkage.
One aspect of the invention is a composition comprising a plurality of conjugated nucleic acids as disclosed herein, wherein:
(i) the composition is, or is essentially, stereopure;
(ii) all stereocentres of all, or of essentially all, of the ligands of said plurality of conjugated nucleic acids have the same stereochemical conformation;
(iii) all stereocentres of all, or of essentially all, of the nucleic acids of said plurality of conjugated nucleic acids have the same stereochemical conformation; and/or
(iv) all stereocentres of all, or of essentially all, of said plurality of conjugated nucleic acids have the same stereochemical conformation.
One aspect of the invention is a composition comprising a conjugated nucleic acid as disclosed herein and a solvent and/or a delivery vehicle and/or a physiologically acceptable excipient and/or a carrier and/or a salt and/or a diluent and/or a buffer and/or a preservative and/or a further therapeutic agent selected from the group comprising an oligonucleotide, a small molecule, a monoclonal antibody, a polyclonal antibody and a peptide. One aspect of the invention is a conjugated nucleic acid as disclosed herein or a composition as disclosed herein for use as a medicament, as well as for use in associated diagnostic or therapeutic methods.
One aspect of the invention is a conjugated nucleic acid as disclosed herein or a composition as disclosed herein for use in the prevention, decrease of the risk of suffering from, or treatment of a disease that can be treated by decreasing the expression of the gene targeted by the nucleic acid, as well as for use in associated diagnostic or therapeutic methods..
One aspect of the invention is the use of a conjugated nucleic acid as disclosed herein or a composition as disclosed herein in the prevention, decrease of the risk of suffering from, or treatment of a disease that can be treated by decreasing the expression of the gene targeted by the nucleic acid.
One aspect of the invention is a method of preventing, decreasing the risk of suffering from, or treating a disease, comprising administering a pharmaceutically effective amount of a conjugated nucleic acid as disclosed herein or a composition as disclosed herein to an individual in need of treatment.
Detailed description of the invention
One aspect of the invention is a conjugated nucleic acid for inhibiting expression of a target gene, wherein the nucleic acid is conjugated to a ligand, wherein:
(i) the ligand comprises a phosphorodithioate (PS2); and/or
(ii) the nucleic acid is conjugated to the ligand via a phosphorodithioate (PS2) linkage.
Conjugated nucleic acids and compositions as described herein may have one or several or all of the following advantages over known conjugated nucleic acids or compositions: ease of synthesis, ease of purification, for example because of a higher degree of steric homogeneity in a composition comprising several nucleic acids, or because the molecular weight of the end product is more different to the molecular weight of building blocks or incomplete synthesis products, which may make separation easier, increased thermal stability, higher melting temperature of double-stranded nucleic acids, increased potency of target inhibition in vitro, enhanced stability in vitro , enhanced metabolic stability in vivo, increased potency of target inhibition in vivo, increased duration of action in vivo, increased affinity of the ligand to the target, and/or other advantages related to one or more of the above.
Preferably, the ligand of the conjugated nucleic acid is free of phosphorothioates (PS).
Preferably, the nucleic acid portion of the conjugated nucleic acid comprises at least one strand, wherein said strand is conjugated to the ligand and is free of phosphorothioates (PS).
The nucleic acid can be a single-stranded nucleic acid, such as an ASO, or a double-stranded nucleic acid, such as a double-stranded siRNA. Preferably, the nucleic acid is double-stranded.
The nucleic acid can also be one strand of a double-stranded nucleic acid in isolation. It can for example be the second (sense) strand of a double-stranded siRNA.
Preferably, the nucleic acid has at least one strand which comprises a sequence of at least 15, 16, 17, 18, 19, 20, 21, 22, 23, 24 or 25 nucleotides that is at least partially complementary, but preferably fully complementary, to a portion of the mRNA of the target gene the nucleic acid is designed to inhibit.
Preferably, the conjugated nucleic acid comprises at least one phosphorodithioate (PS2) internucleotide linkage. The at least one phosphorodithioate (PS2) internucleotide linkage can be in the nucleic acid strand that is conjugated to the ligand or in a nucleic acid strand that is hybridised to the nucleic acid strand that is conjugated to the ligand. The nucleic acid can comprise more than one phosphorodithioate (PS2) internucleotide linkage. It can comprise two, three, four, five, six, seven, eight, nine or ten phosphorodithioate (PS2) internucleotide linkages. These phosphorodithioate (PS2) internucleotide linkages can all be present in the nucleic acid strand that is conjugated to the ligand and/or in a nucleic acid strand that is hybridised to the nucleic acid conjugated to the ligand and/or distributed between the nucleic acid strand that is conjugated to the ligand and the nucleic acid strand that is hybridised to the nucleic acid strand that is conjugated to the ligand.
Preferably, the conjugated nucleic acid is an siRNA. siRNAs are short interfering or short silencing RNAs that are capable of inhibiting the expression of a target gene through the RNA interference (RNAi) pathway. Inhibition occurs through targeted degradation of mRNA transcripts of the target gene after transcription. The siRNA forms part of the RISC complex. The RISC complex specifically targets the target mRNA by sequence complementarity of the first (antisense) strand with the target sequence. siRNAs can be single- or double-stranded nucleic acids. Preferably, the siRNA is a double-stranded siRNA.
Preferably, the conjugated nucleic acid comprises a first strand and a second strand. In such a case, the first strand of the nucleic acid is preferably at least partially complementary to a target sequence. In addition, the first strand and the second strand are preferably at least partially complementary to each other. Complementarity should be sufficient for the first strand and the second strand to form a stable duplex under physiological conditions and/or for the first strand and the target sequence to form a stable duplex under physiological conditions. In such a case, the nucleic acid portion of the conjugated nucleic acid is a double-stranded nucleic acid. Preferably, in this case, the ligand is conjugated to the second strand.
Preferably, the first strand and/or the second strand of the conjugated nucleic acid is/are free of phosphorothioates (PS), i.e. , there are no phosphorothioate (PS) internucleotide linkages present in the first and/or the second strand.
A double-stranded nucleic acid is a nucleic acid in which the first strand and the second strand hybridise to each other over at least part of their lengths and are therefore capable of forming a duplex region under physiological conditions, such as in PBS at 37°C at a concentration of 1 mM of each strand. The first and second strand are preferably able to hybridise to each other and therefore to form a duplex region over a region of at least 15 nucleotides, preferably 16, 17, 18 or 19 nucleotides. This duplex region comprises nucleotide base parings between the two strands, preferably based on Watson-Crick base pairing and/or wobble base pairing (such as GU base pairing). All the nucleotides of the two strands within a duplex region do not have to base pair to each other to form a duplex region. A certain number of mismatches, deletions or insertions between the nucleotide sequences of the two strands are acceptable. Overhangs on either end of the first or second strand or unpaired nucleotides at either end of the double- stranded nucleic acid are also possible. The double-stranded nucleic acid is preferably a stable double-stranded nucleic acid under physiological conditions, and preferably has a melting temperature (Tm) of 45°C or more, 50°C or more, 55°C or more, 60°C or more, 65°C or more, 70°C or more, 75°C or more, 80°C or more, or 85°C or more, for example in PBS at a concentration of 1 mM of each strand. The first strand and the second strand are preferably capable of forming a duplex region (i.e., are complementary to each other) over i) at least a portion of their lengths, preferably over at least 15 nucleotides of both of their lengths, ii) over the entire length of the first strand, iii) over the entire length of the second strand or iv) over the entire length of both the first and the second strand. Strands being complementary to each other over a certain length means that the strands are able to base pair to each other, either via Watson-Crick or wobble base pairing, over that length. Each nucleotide of the length does not necessarily have to be able to base pair with its counterpart in the other strand over the entire given length as long as a stable double-stranded nucleotide under physiological conditions can be formed. It is however preferred, in certain embodiments, if each nucleotide of the length can base pair with its counterpart in the other strand over the entire given length.
A certain number of mismatches, deletions or insertions between the first strand and the target sequence, or between the first strand and the second strand can be tolerated in the context of the double-stranded siRNA and even have the potential in certain cases to increase RNA interference (e.g., inhibition) activity.
The inhibition activity of the conjugated nucleic acids according to the present invention relies on the formation of a duplex region between all or a portion of the first strand and a portion of a target nucleic acid. The portion of the target nucleic acid that forms a duplex region with the first strand, defined as beginning with the first base pair formed between the first strand and the target sequence and ending with the last base pair formed between the first strand and the target sequence, inclusive, is the target nucleic acid sequence or simply, target sequence. The duplex region formed between the first strand and the second strand need not be the same as the duplex region formed between the first strand and the target sequence. That is, the second strand may have a sequence different from the target sequence; however, the first strand must be able to form a duplex structure with both the second strand and the target sequence, at least under physiological conditions.
Nucleic acids that are capable of hybridising under physiological conditions are nucleic acids that are capable of forming base pairs, preferably Watson-Crick or wobble base-pairs, between at least a portion of the opposed nucleotides in the strands so as to form at least a duplex region. Such a double-stranded nucleic acid is preferably a stable double-stranded nucleic acid under physiological conditions (for example in PBS at 37°C at a concentration of 1 mM of each strand), meaning that under such conditions, the two strands stay hybridised to each other. The Tm of the double-stranded nucleotide is preferably 45°C or more, 50°C or more, 55°C or more, 60°C or more, 65°C or more, 70°C or more, 75°C or more, 80°C or more, or 85°C or more, for example in PBS at a concentration of 1 mM of each strand.
The complementarity between the first strand and the target sequence may be perfect (i.e. , 100% identity with no nucleotide mismatches or insertions or deletions in the first strand as compared to the target sequence).
The complementarity between the first strand and the target sequence may not be perfect. The complementarity may be from about 70% to about 100%. More specifically, the complementarity may be at least 70%, 80%, 85%, 90% or 95% and intermediate values.
The identity between the first strand and the complementary sequence of the target sequence may range from about 75% to about 100%. More specifically, the complementarity may be at least 75%, 80%, 85%, 90% or 95% and intermediate values, provided a nucleic acid is capable of reducing or inhibiting the expression of the target gene.
A nucleic acid having less than 100% complementarity between the first strand and the target sequence may be able to reduce the expression of the target gene to the same level as a nucleic acid having perfect complementarity between the first strand and target sequence. Alternatively, it may be able to reduce expression of the expression of the target gene to a level that is 15%, 20%, 25%, 30%, 35%, 40%, 45%, 50%, 55%, 60%, 65%, 70%, 75%, 80%, 85%, 90%, 95%, 98%, 99% or 100% of the level of reduction achieved by the nucleic acid with perfect complementarity.
The conjugated nucleic acid is capable of inhibiting the target gene. The inhibition is preferably mediated by the RNA interference (RNAi) mechanism. Preferably, the nucleic acid mediates RNA interference (i.e., it is capable of inhibiting its target) with an efficacy of at least 50% inhibition, more preferably at least 70%, more preferably at least 80%, even more preferably at least 90%, yet more preferably at least 95% and most preferably 100% inhibition. The inhibition efficacy is preferably measured by comparing the target mRNA level in cells, such as hepatocytes, treated with a target-specific siRNA to the target-mRNA level in cells treated with a control in a comparable experiment. The control can be a treatment with a siRNA that has a different target or without a siRNA. The nucleic acid, or at least the first strand of the nucleic acid, is therefore preferably able to be incorporated into the RISC complex. As a result, the nucleic acid, or at least the first strand of the nucleic acid, is therefore able to guide the RISC complex to a specific target RNA with which the nucleic acid, or at least the first strand of the nucleic acid, is at least partially complementary. The RISC complex then specifically cleaves this target RNA and as a result leads to inhibition of the expression of the gene from which the RNA stems.
In one embodiment, the target gene of the conjugated nucleic acid is a gene other than one, several or all of the following: Complement C3 (complement component C3), XDH (Xanthine Dehydrogenase), PROS1 (Protein S) and/or CNNM4 (Cyclin And CBS Domain Divalent Metal Cation Transport Mediator 4). This means that the conjugated nucleic acid is unable to specifically inhibit the expression of any one, several or all of these genes, preferably in human cells and/or in the human body. This can be achieved by not having a nucleic acid sequence that is sufficiently complementary to any portion of the mRNA of these genes to induce inhibition of the genes.
When reference is made herein to a sequence comprising or consisting of a number of nucleotides that are not shown to be modified in that sequence, the reference also encompasses the same nucleotide sequence in which one, several, such as two, three, four, five, six, seven or more, including all, nucleotides are modified by modifications such as 2’- OMe, 2’-F, are linked to a ligand or a linker, have a 3’ end or 5’ end modification or any other modification. It also encompasses sequences in which two or more nucleotides are linked to each other by the natural phosphodiester linkage or by any other linkage such as a phosphorothioate or a phosphorodithioate linkage.
In one aspect, if the 5’-most nucleotide of the first strand of a nucleic acid is a nucleotide other than A or U, this nucleotide is replaced by an A or U. Preferably, if the 5’-most nucleotide of the first strand is a nucleotide other than a U, this nucleotide is replaced by U, and more preferably by U with a 5’ (E)-vinylphosphonate, in the sequence.
In one aspect, there is a mismatch between the first nucleotide at the 5’ end of the first strand and the corresponding nucleotide (the nucleotide with which it would form a base pair if there was no mismatch) in the second strand. For example, the 5’ nucleotide of the first strand may be U and the corresponding nucleotide in the second strand may be any nucleotide other than A. In this case, the two nucleotides are unable to form a classical Watson-Crick base pair and there is a mismatch between the two nucleotides.
The conjugated nucleic acids described herein may be capable of inhibiting the expression of a target gene, preferably in a cell. The conjugated nucleic acids may be capable of inhibiting the target gene expression completely, resulting in 0% remaining expression upon treatment with the nucleic acids. The conjugated nucleic acids may be capable of partially inhibiting the target gene expression. Partial inhibition means that the target gene expression is decreased by 15%, 20%, 30%, 40%, 50%, 60%, 70%, 75%, 80%, 85%, 90%, 95% or more, or intermediate values, as compared to the absence of the conjugated nucleic acids under comparable conditions. The level of inhibition may be measured by comparing a treated sample with an untreated sample or with a sample treated with a control, such as for example a siRNA that does not target the target gene because it has a sequence that does not hybridise with the target gene mRNA. Inhibition may be measured by measuring the target gene mRNA and/or protein levels or levels of a biomarker or indicator that correlates with target gene product presence or activity. It may be measured in cells that may have been treated in vitro with a conjugated nucleic acid described herein. Alternatively, or in addition, inhibition may be measured in cells, such as hepatocytes, or tissue, such as liver tissue, or an organ, such as the liver, or in a body fluid such as blood, serum, lymph or in any other body part or fluid that has been taken from a subject previously treated with a nucleic acid disclosed herein. Preferably, inhibition of the target gene expression is determined by comparing the target gene mRNA level measured in target gene -expressing cells after 24 or 48 hours in vitro treatment with a conjugated nucleic acid disclosed herein under ideal conditions (see the examples for appropriate concentrations and conditions) to the target gene mRNA level measured in control cells that were untreated or mock treated or treated with a control conjugated nucleic acid under the same or at least comparable conditions.
One aspect of the present invention relates to a conjugated nucleic acid, wherein the first strand and the second strand are present on a single strand of a nucleic acid that loops around so that the first strand and the second strand are able to hybridise to each other and to thereby form a double-stranded nucleic acid with a duplex region.
Preferably, the first strand and the second strand of the conjugated nucleic acid are separate strands. The two separate strands are preferably each 17-25 nucleotides in length, more preferably 18-25 nucleotides in length. The two strands may be of the same or different lengths. The first strand may be 17-25 nucleotides in length, preferably it may be 18-24 nucleotides in length, it may be 18, 19, 20, 21, 22, 23 or 24 nucleotides in length. Most preferably, the first strand is 19 nucleotides in length. The second strand may independently be 17-25 nucleotides in length, preferably it may be 18-24 nucleotides in length, it may be 18, 19, 20, 21 , 22, 23 or 24 nucleotides in length. More preferably, the second strand is 18 or 19 or 20 nucleotides in length, and most preferably it is 19 nucleotides in length.
Preferably, the first strand and the second strand of the conjugated nucleic acid form a duplex region of 17-25 nucleotides in length. More preferably, the duplex region is 18-24 nucleotides in length. The duplex region may be 17, 18, 19, 20, 21 , 22, 23, 24 or 25 nucleotides in length. In the most preferably embodiment, the duplex region is 18 or 19 nucleotides in length. The duplex region is defined here as the region between and including the 5’-most nucleotide of the first strand that is base paired to a nucleotide of the second strand to the 3’-most nucleotide of the first strand that is base paired to a nucleotide of the second strand. The duplex region may comprise nucleotides in either or both strands that are not base-paired to a nucleotide in the other strand. It may comprise one, two, three or four such nucleotides on the first strand and/or on the second strand. However, preferably, the duplex region consists of 17-25 consecutive nucleotide base pairs. That is to say that it preferably comprises 17-25 consecutive nucleotides on both of the strands that all base pair to a nucleotide in the other strand. More preferably, the duplex region consists of 18 or 19 consecutive nucleotide base pairs, most preferably 18.
The nucleic acid portion of a conjugated nucleic acid comprising a first strand and a second strand may have an overhang at one end and a blunt end at the other end. The nucleic acid may have an overhang at both ends. The nucleic acid may be blunt ended at both ends. The nucleic acid may be blunt ended at the end with the 5' end of the first strand and the 3' end of the second strand or at the 3’ end of the first strand and the 5' end of the second strand.
The nucleic acid portion of the conjugated nucleic acid may comprise an overhang at a 3' or 5' end. The nucleic acid may have a 3' overhang on the first strand. The nucleic acid may have a 3' overhang on the second strand. The nucleic acid may have a 5' overhang on the first strand. The nucleic acid may have a 5' overhang on the second strand. The nucleic acid may have an overhang at both the 5' end and 3' end of the first strand. The nucleic acid may have an overhang at both the 5' end and 3' end of the second strand. The nucleic acid may have a 5' overhang on the first strand and a 3' overhang on the second strand. The nucleic acid may have a 3' overhang on the first strand and a 5' overhang on the second strand. The nucleic acid may have a 3' overhang on the first strand and a 3' overhang on the second strand. The nucleic acid may have a 5' overhang on the first strand and a 5' overhang on the second strand.
An overhang at the 3’ end or 5’ end of the second strand or the first strand may consist of 1, 2, 3, 4 and 5 nucleotides in length. Optionally, an overhang may consist of 1 or 2 nucleotides, which may or may not be modified.
In one embodiment, the 5’ end of the first strand is a single-stranded overhang of one, two or three nucleotides, preferably of one nucleotide. Nucleic acid modifications
The conjugated nucleic acids discussed herein include unmodified RNA as well as RNA which has been modified, e.g., to improve efficacy or stability. Unmodified RNA refers to a molecule in which the components of the nucleic acid, namely sugars, bases, and phosphate moieties, are the same or essentially the same as those which occur in nature, for example as occur naturally in the human body. The term “modified nucleotide” as used herein refers to a nucleotide in which one or more of the components of the nucleotide, namely the sugar, base, and phosphate moiety, is/are different from those which occur in nature. The term “modified nucleotide” also refers in certain cases to molecules that are not nucleotides in the strict sense of the term because they lack, or have a substitute of, an essential component of a nucleotide, such as the sugar, base or phosphate moiety. A nucleic acid comprising such modified nucleotides is still to be understood as being a nucleic acid, even if one or more of the nucleotides of the nucleic acid has been replaced by a modified nucleotide that lacks, or has a substitution of, an essential component of a nucleotide.
Modifications of the nucleic acid of the present invention generally provide a powerful tool in overcoming potential limitations including, but not limited to, in vitro and in vivo stability and bioavailability inherent to native RNA molecules. The nucleic acids according to the invention may be modified by chemical modifications. Modified nucleic acids can also minimise the possibility of inducing interferon activity in humans. Modifications can further enhance the functional delivery of a nucleic acid to a target cell. The modified nucleic acids of the present invention may comprise one or more chemically modified ribonucleotides of either or both of the first strand or the second strand, when they have a first and second strand. A ribonucleotide may comprise a chemical modification of the base, sugar or phosphate moieties. The ribonucleic acid may be modified by substitution with or insertion of analogues of nucleic acids or bases.
Throughout the description of the invention, “same or common modification” means the same modification to any nucleotide, be that A, G, C or U modified with a group such as a methyl group (2’-OMe) or a fluoro group (2’-F). For example, 2'-F-dU, 2'-F-dA, 2'-F-dC, 2'-F-dG are all considered to be the same or common modification, as are 2'-OMe-rU, 2'-OMe-rA; 2'-OMe- rC; 2'-OMe-rG. In contrast, a 2’-F modification is a different modification compared to a 2’-OMe modification.
Preferably, at least one nucleotide of the conjugated nucleic acid is a modified nucleotide, preferably a non-naturally occurring nucleotide such as preferably a 2’-F modified nucleotide. Preferably, at least one nucleotide of the first and/or second strand of the conjugated nucleic acid is a modified nucleotide, preferably a non-naturally occurring nucleotide such as preferably a 2’-F modified nucleotide.
A modified nucleotide can be a nucleotide with a modification of the sugar group. The 2' hydroxyl group (OH) can be modified or replaced with a number of different “oxy” or “deoxy” substituents.
Examples of “oxy”-2' hydroxyl group modifications include alkoxy or aryloxy (OR, e.g., R=H, alkyl (such as methyl), cycloalkyl, aryl, aralkyl, heteroaryl or sugar); polyethyleneglycols (PEG), 0(CH2CH20)nCH2CH20R; “locked” nucleic acids (LNA) in which the 2' hydroxyl is connected, e.g., by a methylene bridge, to the 4' carbon of the same ribose sugar; O-AMINE (AMINE=NH2, alkylamino, dialkylamino, heterocyclyl, arylamino, diaryl amino, heteroaryl amino, or diheteroaryl amino, ethylene diamine or polyamino) and aminoalkoxy, 0(CH2)nAMINE, (e.g., AMINE=NH2, alkylamino, dialkylamino, heterocyclyl, arylamino, diaryl amino, heteroaryl amino, or diheteroaryl amino, ethylene diamine or polyamino).
“Deoxy” modifications include hydrogen, halogen, amino (e.g., NH2, alkylamino, dialkylamino, heterocyclyl, arylamino, diaryl amino, heteroaryl amino, diheteroaryl amino, or amino acid); NH(CH2CH2NH)nCH2CH2-AMINE (AMINE=NH2, alkylamino, dialkylamino, heterocyclyl, arylamino, diaryl amino, heteroaryl amino, or diheteroaryl amino), — NHC(0)R (R=alkyl, cycloalkyl, aryl, aralkyl, heteroaryl or sugar), cyano; mercapto; alkyl-thio-alkyl; thioalkoxy; and alkyl, cycloalkyl, aryl, alkenyl and alkynyl, which may be optionally substituted with e.g., an amino functionality. Other substituents of certain embodiments include 2'-methoxyethyl, 2- OCHs, 2'-0-allyl, 2'-C-allyl, and 2'-fluoro.
The sugar group can also contain one or more carbons that possess the opposite stereochemical configuration than that of the corresponding carbon in ribose. Thus, a modified nucleotide may contain a sugar such as arabinose.
Modified nucleotides can also include “abasic” sugars, which lack a nucleobase at C - T. These abasic sugars can further contain modifications at one or more of the constituent sugar atoms.
The 2' modifications may be used in combination with one or more phosphate internucleotide linker modifications (e.g., phosphorothioate or phosphorodithioate). One or more nucleotides of a conjugated nucleic acid of the present invention may be modified. The nucleic acid may comprise at least one modified nucleotide. The modified nucleotide may be in the first strand. The modified nucleotide may be in the second strand. The modified nucleotide may be in the duplex region. The modified nucleotide may be outside the duplex region, i.e., in a single-stranded region. The modified nucleotide may be on the first strand and may be outside the duplex region. The modified nucleotide may be on the second strand and may be outside the duplex region. The 3’-terminal nucleotide of the first strand may be a modified nucleotide. The 3’-terminal nucleotide of the second strand may be a modified nucleotide. The 5’-terminal nucleotide of the first strand may be a modified nucleotide. The 5’- terminal nucleotide of the second strand may be a modified nucleotide.
A conjugated nucleic acid of the invention may have 1 modified nucleotide or a nucleic acid of the invention may have about 2-4 modified nucleotides, or a nucleic acid may have about 4-6 modified nucleotides, about 6-8 modified nucleotides, about 8-10 modified nucleotides, about 10-12 modified nucleotides, about 12-14 modified nucleotides, about 14-16 modified nucleotides about 16-18 modified nucleotides, about 18-20 modified nucleotides, about 20-22 modified nucleotides, about 22-24 modified nucleotides, about 24-26 modified nucleotides or about 26-28 modified nucleotides. All nucleotides of the nucleic acids may be modified nucleotides. In each case the nucleic acid comprising said modified nucleotides retains at least 50% of its activity as compared to the same nucleic acid but without said modified nucleotides or vice versa. The nucleic acid may retain 55%, 60%, 65%, 70%, 75%, 80%, 85%, 90%, 95% or 100% and intermediate values of its activity as compared to the same nucleic acid but without said modified nucleotides, or may have more than 100% of the activity of the same nucleic acid without said modified nucleotides.
The modified nucleotide may be a purine or a pyrimidine. At least half of the purines may be modified. At least half of the pyrimidines may be modified. All of the purines may be modified. All of the pyrimidines may be modified. The modified nucleotides may be selected from the group consisting of a 3' terminal deoxy thymine (dT) nucleotide, a 2'-0-methyl (2’-OMe) modified nucleotide, a 2’ modified nucleotide, a 2' deoxy modified nucleotide, a locked nucleotide, an abasic nucleotide, a 2' amino modified nucleotide, a 2' alkyl modified nucleotide, a 2’-deoxy-2’-fluoro (2’-F) modified nucleotide, a morpholino nucleotide, a phosphoramidate, a non-natural base comprising nucleotide, a nucleotide comprising a 5'-phosphorothioate group, a nucleotide comprising a 5' phosphate or 5' phosphate mimic and a terminal nucleotide linked to a cholesteryl derivative or a dodecanoic acid bisdecylamide group. The conjugated nucleic acid may comprise a nucleotide comprising a modified base, wherein the base is selected from 2-aminoadenosine, 2,6-diaminopurine,inosine, pyridin-4-one, pyridin-2-one, phenyl, pseudouracil, 2, 4, 6-trimethoxy benzene, 3-methyl uracil, dihydrouridine, naphthyl, aminophenyl, 5-alkylcytidine (e.g., 5-methylcytidine), 5-alkyluridine (e.g., ribothymidine), 5-halouridine (e.g., 5-bromouridine), 6-azapyrimidine, 6-alkylpyrimidine (e.g. 6-methyluridine), propyne, quesosine, 2-thiouridine, 4-thiouridine, wybutosine, wybutoxosine, 4-acetylcytidine, 5-(carboxyhydroxymethyl)uridine, 5'- carboxymethylaminomethyl-2-thiouridine, 5-carboxymethylaminomethyluridine, beta-D- galactosylqueosine, 1-methyladenosine, 1-methylinosine, 2,2-dimethylguanosine, 3- methylcytidine, 2-methyladenosine, 2-methylguanosine, N6-methyladenosine, 7- methylguanosine, 5-methoxyaminomethyl-2-thiouridine, 5-methylaminomethyluridine, 5- methylcarbonylmethyluridine, 5-methyloxyuridine, 5-methyl-2-thiouridine, 2-methylthio-N6- isopentenyladenosine, beta-D-mannosylqueosine, uridine-5-oxyacetic acid and 2-thiocytidine.
Many of the modifications described herein and that occur within a nucleic acid will be repeated within a polynucleotide molecule, such as a modification of a base, or a phosphate moiety, or a non-linking O of a phosphate moiety. In some cases, the modification will occur at all of the possible positions/nucleotides in the polynucleotide but in many cases it will not. A modification may only occur at a 3' or 5' terminal position, may only occur in a terminal region, such as at a position on a terminal nucleotide or in the last 2, 3, 4, 5, or 10 nucleotides of a strand. A modification may occur in a double-strand region, a single-strand region, or in both. A modification may occur only in the double-strand region of a nucleic acid of the invention or may only occur in a single-strand region of a nucleic acid of the invention. A phosphorothioate or phosphorodithioate modification at a non-linking O position may only occur at one or both termini, may only occur in a terminal region, e.g., at a position on a terminal nucleotide or in the last 2, 3, 4 or 5 nucleotides of a strand, or may occur in duplex and/or in single-strand regions, preferably at termini. The 5' end and/or 3’ end may be phosphorylated.
Stability of a conjugated nucleic acid of the invention may be increased by including particular bases in overhangs, or by including modified nucleotides, in single-strand overhangs, e.g., in a 5' or 3' overhang, or in both. Purine nucleotides may be included in overhangs. All or some of the bases in a 3' or 5' overhang may be modified. Modifications can include the use of modifications at the 2' OH group of the ribose sugar, the use of deoxyribonucleotides, instead of ribonucleotides, and modifications in the phosphate group, such as phosphorothioate or phosphorodithioate modifications. Overhangs need not be homologous with the target sequence. Nucleases can hydrolyse nucleic acid phosphodiester (PO) bonds. However, chemical modifications to nucleic acids can confer improved properties, and, can render oligoribonucleotides more stable to nucleases.
Conjugated nucleic acids can include one or more of:
(i) alteration, e.g., replacement, of one or both of the non-linking phosphate oxygens and/or of one or more of the linking phosphate oxygens;
(ii) alteration, e.g., replacement, of a constituent of the ribose sugar, e.g., of the 2' hydroxyl on the ribose sugar;
(iii) replacement of the phosphate moiety with “dephospho” linkers;
(iv) modification or replacement of a naturally occurring base;
(v) replacement or modification of the ribose-phosphate backbone; and
(vi) modification of the 3' end or 5' end of the first strand and/or the second strand, e.g., removal, modification or replacement of a terminal phosphate group or conjugation of a moiety, e.g., a fluorescently labelled moiety, to either the 3' or 5' end of one or both strands.
The terms replacement, modification and alteration indicate a difference from a naturally occurring molecule.
Specific modifications are discussed in more detail below.
The conjugated nucleic acid may comprise one or more nucleotides on the second and/or first strand that are modified. Alternating nucleotides may be modified, to form modified nucleotides.
Alternating as described herein means to occur one after another in a regular way. In other words, alternating means to occur in turn repeatedly. For example, if one nucleotide is modified, the next contiguous nucleotide is not modified and the following contiguous nucleotide is modified and so on. One nucleotide may be modified with a first modification, the next contiguous nucleotide may be modified with a second modification and the following contiguous nucleotide is modified with the first modification and so on, where the first and second modifications are different.
Some representative modified nucleic acid sequences of the present invention are shown in the examples. These examples are meant to be representative and not limiting. In one aspect of the conjugated nucleic acid, at least nucleotides 2 and 14 of the first strand are modified, preferably by a first common modification, the nucleotides being numbered consecutively starting with nucleotide number 1 at the 5’ end of the first strand. The first modification is preferably 2’-F.
In one aspect, at least one, several or preferably all the even-numbered nucleotides of the first strand are modified, preferably by a first common modification, the nucleotides being numbered consecutively starting with nucleotide number 1 at the 5’ end of the first strand. The first modification is preferably 2’-F.
In one aspect, at least one, several or preferably all the odd-numbered nucleotides of the first strand are modified, the nucleotides being numbered consecutively starting with nucleotide number 1 at the 5’ end of the first strand. Preferably, they are modified by a second modification. This second modification is preferably different from the first modification if the nucleic acid also comprises a first modification, for example of nucleotides 2 and 14 or of all the even-numbered nucleotides of the first strand. The first modification is preferably any 2’ ribose modification that is of the same size or smaller in volume than a 2’-OH group, or a locked nucleic acid (LNA), or an unlocked nucleic acid (UNA), or a 2'-Fluoroarabino Nucleic Acid (FANA) modification. A 2’ ribose modification that is of the same size or smaller in volume than a 2’-OH group can for example be a 2’-F, 2’-H, 2’-halo, or 2 -NH2. The second modification is preferably any 2’ ribose modification that is larger in volume than a 2’-OH group. A 2’ ribose modification that is larger in volume than a 2’-OH group can for example be a 2’-OMe, 2’-0- MOE (2’-0-methoxyethyl), 2’-0-allyl or 2’-0-alkyl, with the proviso that the nucleic is capable of reducing the expression of the target gene to at least the same extent as the same nucleic acid without the modification(s) under comparable conditions. The first modification is preferably 2’-F and/or the second modification is preferably 2’-OMe.
In the context of this disclosure, the size or volume of a substituent, such as a 2’ ribose modification, is preferably measured as the van der Waals volume.
In one aspect, at least one, several or preferably all the nucleotides of the second strand in a position corresponding to an even-numbered nucleotide of the first strand are modified, preferably by a third modification. Preferably in the same nucleic acid nucleotides 2 and 14 or all the even numbered nucleotides of the first strand are modified with a first modification. In addition, or alternatively, the odd-numbered nucleotides of the first strand are modified with a second modification. Preferably, the third modification is different from the first modification and/or the third modification is the same as the second modification. The first modification is preferably any 2’ ribose modification that is of the same size or smaller in volume than a 2’-OH group, or a locked nucleic acid (LNA), or an unlocked nucleic acid (UNA), or a 2'-Fluoroarabino Nucleic Acid (FANA) modification. A 2’ ribose modification that is of the same size or smaller in volume than a 2’-OH group can for example be a 2’-F, 2’-H, 2’-halo, or 2’-NH2. The second and/or third modification is preferably any 2’ ribose modification that is larger in volume than a 2’-OH group. A 2’ ribose modification that is larger in volume than a 2’-OH group can for example be a 2’-OMe, 2’-0-MOE (2’-0-methoxyethyl), 2’-0-allyl or 2’-0-alkyl, with the proviso that the nucleic is capable of reducing the expression of the target gene to at least the same extent as the same nucleic acid without the modification(s) under comparable conditions. The first modification is preferably 2’-F and/or the second and/or third modification is/are preferably 2’-OMe. The nucleotides on the first strand are numbered consecutively starting with nucleotide number 1 at the 5’ end of the first strand.
A nucleotide of the second strand that is in a position corresponding, for example, to an even- numbered nucleotide of the first strand is a nucleotide of the second strand that is base-paired to an even-numbered nucleotide of the first strand.
In one aspect, at least one, several or preferably all the nucleotides of the second strand in a position corresponding to an odd-numbered nucleotide of the first strand are modified, preferably by a fourth modification. Preferably in the same nucleic acid nucleotides 2 and 14 or all the even numbered nucleotides of the first strand are modified with a first modification. In addition, or alternatively, the odd-numbered nucleotides of the first strand are modified with a second modification. In addition, or alternatively, all the nucleotides of the second strand in a position corresponding to an even-numbered nucleotide of the first strand are modified with a third modification. The fourth modification is preferably different from the second modification and preferably different from the third modification and the fourth modification is preferably the same as the first modification. The first and/or fourth modification is preferably any 2’ ribose modification that is of the same size or smaller in volume than a 2’-OH group, or a locked nucleic acid (LNA), or an unlocked nucleic acid (UNA), or a 2'-Fluoroarabino Nucleic Acid (FANA) modification. A 2’ ribose modification that is of the same size or smaller in volume than a 2’-OH group can for example be a 2’-F, 2’-H, 2’-halo, or 2’-NH2. The second and/or third modification is preferably any 2’ ribose modification that is larger in volume than a 2’-OH group. A 2’ ribose modification that is larger in volume than a 2’-OH group can for example be a 2’- OMe, 2’-0-MOE (2’-0-methoxyethyl), 2’-0-allyl or 2’-0-alkyl, with the proviso that the nucleic is capable of reducing the expression of the target gene to at least the same extent as the same nucleic acid without the modification(s) under comparable conditions. The first and/or the fourth modification is/are preferably a 2’-OMe modification and/or the second and/or third modification is/are preferably a 2’-F modification. The nucleotides on the first strand are numbered consecutively starting with nucleotide number 1 at the 5’ end of the first strand.
In one aspect of the nucleic acid, the nucleotide/nucleotides of the second strand in a position corresponding to nucleotide 11 or nucleotide 13 or nucleotides 11 and 13 or nucleotides 11-
13 of the first strand is/are modified by a fourth modification. Preferably, all the nucleotides of the second strand other than the nucleotide/nucleotides in a position corresponding to nucleotide 11 or nucleotide 13 or nucleotides 11 and 13 or nucleotides 11-13 of the first strand is/are modified by a third modification. Preferably in the same nucleic acid nucleotides 2 and
14 or all the even numbered nucleotides of the first strand are modified with a first modification. In addition, or alternatively, the odd-numbered nucleotides of the first strand are modified with a second modification. The fourth modification is preferably different from the second modification and preferably different from the third modification and the fourth modification is preferably the same as the first modification. The first and/or fourth modification is preferably any 2’ ribose modification that is of the same size or smaller in volume than a 2’-OH group, or a locked nucleic acid (LNA), or an unlocked nucleic acid (UNA), or a 2'-Fluoroarabino Nucleic Acid (FANA) modification. A 2’ ribose modification that is of the same size or smaller in volume than a 2’-OH group can for example be a 2’-F, 2’-H, 2’-halo, or 2’-NH2. The second and/or third modification is preferably any 2’ ribose modification that is larger in volume than a 2’-OH group. A 2’ ribose modification that is larger in volume than a 2’-OH group can for example be a 2’- OMe, 2’-0-MOE (2’-0-methoxyethyl), 2’-0-allyl or 2’-0-alkyl, with the proviso that the nucleic is capable of reducing the expression of the target gene to at least the same extent as the same nucleic acid without the modification(s) under comparable conditions. The first and/or the fourth modification is/are preferably a 2’-OMe modification and/or the second and/or third modification is/are preferably a 2’-F modification. The nucleotides on the first strand are numbered consecutively starting with nucleotide number 1 at the 5’ end of the first strand.
In one aspect of the conjugated nucleic acid, all the even-numbered nucleotides of the first strand are modified by a first modification, all the odd-numbered nucleotides of the first strand are modified by a second modification, all the nucleotides of the second strand in a position corresponding to an even-numbered nucleotide of the first strand are modified by a third modification, all the nucleotides of the second strand in a position corresponding to an odd- numbered nucleotide of the first strand are modified by a fourth modification, wherein the first and/or fourth modification is/are 2’-F and/or the second and/or third modification is/are 2’-OMe.
In one aspect of the conjugated nucleic acid, all the even-numbered nucleotides of the first strand are modified by a first modification, all the odd-numbered nucleotides of the first strand are modified by a second modification, all the nucleotides of the second strand in positions corresponding to nucleotides 11-13 of the first strand are modified by a fourth modification, all the nucleotides of the second strand other than the nucleotides corresponding to nucleotides 11-13 of the first strand are modified by a third modification, wherein the first and fourth modification are 2’-F and the second and third modification are 2’-OMe. In one embodiment in this aspect, the 3’ terminal nucleotide of the second strand is an inverted RNA nucleotide (i.e. , the nucleotide is linked to the 3’ end of the strand through its 3’ carbon, rather than through its 5’ carbon as would normally be the case). When the 3’ terminal nucleotide of the second strand is an inverted RNA nucleotide, the inverted RNA nucleotide is preferably an unmodified nucleotide in the sense that it does not comprise any modifications compared to the natural nucleotide counterpart. Specifically, the inverted RNA nucleotide is preferably a 2’-OH nucleotide. Preferably, in this aspect when the 3’ terminal nucleotide of the second strand is an inverted RNA nucleotide, the nucleic acid is blunt-ended at least at the end that comprises the 5’ end of the first strand.
One aspect of the present invention is a conjugated nucleic acid as disclosed herein for inhibiting expression of a target gene, preferably in a cell, wherein the nucleic acid comprises a first strand and a second strand and wherein said first strand includes modified nucleotides or unmodified nucleotides at a plurality of positions in order to facilitate processing of the nucleic acid by RISC.
In one aspect, “facilitate processing by RISC” means that the nucleic acid can be processed by RISC, for example any modification present will permit the nucleic acid to be processed by RISC and preferably, will be beneficial to processing by RISC, suitably such that siRNA activity can take place.
One aspect is a conjugated nucleic acid as disclosed herein, wherein the nucleotides at positions 2 and 14 from the 5’ end of the first strand are not modified with a 2’-OMe modification, and the nucleotide/nucleotides on the second strand which corresponds to position 11 or position 13 or positions 11 and 13 or positions 11, 12 and 13 of the first strand is/are not modified with a 2’-OMe modification (in other words, they are naturally occurring nucleotides or are modified with a modification other than 2’-OMe).
In one aspect, the nucleotide on the second strand which corresponds to position 13 of the first strand is the nucleotide that forms a base pair with position 13 (from the 5’ end) of the first strand. In one aspect, the nucleotide on the second strand which corresponds to position 11 of the first strand is the nucleotide that forms a base pair with position 11 (from the 5’ end) of the first strand.
In one aspect, the nucleotide on the second strand which corresponds to position 12 of the first strand is the nucleotide that forms a base pair with position 12 (from the 5’ end) of the first strand.
For example, in a 19-mer nucleic acid which is double-stranded and blunt ended, position 13 (from the 5’ end) of the first strand would pair with position 7 (from the 5’ end) of the second strand. Position 11 (from the 5’ end) of the first strand would pair with position 9 (from the 5’ end) of the second strand. This nomenclature may be applied to other positions of the second strand.
In one aspect, in the case of a partially complementary first and second strand, the nucleotide on the second strand that “corresponds to” a position on the first strand may not necessarily form a base pair if that position is the position in which there is a mismatch, but the principle of the nomenclature still applies.
One aspect is a conjugated nucleic acid as disclosed herein, wherein the nucleotides at positions 2 and 14 from the 5’ end of the first strand are not modified with a 2’-OMe modification, and the nucleotides on the second strand which correspond to position 11, or 13, or 11 and 13, or 11-13 of the first strand are modified with a 2'-F modification.
One aspect is a conjugated nucleic acid as disclosed herein, wherein the nucleotides at positions 2 and 14 from the 5’ end of the first strand are modified with a 2'-F modification, and the nucleotides on the second strand which correspond to position 11, or 13, or 11 and 13, or 11-13 of the first strand are not modified with a 2’-OMe modification.
One aspect is a conjugated nucleic acid as disclosed herein, wherein the nucleotides at positions 2 and 14 from the 5’ end of the first strand are modified with a 2'-F modification, and the nucleotides on the second strand which correspond to position 11, or 13, or 11 and 13, or 11-13 of the first strand are modified with a 2'-F modification.
One aspect is a conjugated nucleic acid as disclosed herein wherein greater than 50% of the nucleotides of the first and/or second strand comprise a 2’-OMe modification, such as greater than 55%, 60%, 65%, 70%, 75%, 80%, or 85%, or more, of the first and/or second strand comprise a 2’-OMe modification.
One aspect is a conjugated nucleic acid as disclosed herein wherein greater than 50% of the nucleotides of the first and/or second strand comprise a naturally occurring RNA modification, such as wherein greater than 55%, 60%, 65%, 70%, 75%, 80%, or 85% or more of the first and/or second strands comprise such a modification. Suitable naturally occurring modifications include, as well as 2’-OMe, other 2’ sugar modifications, in particular a 2’-H modification resulting in a DNA nucleotide.
One aspect is a conjugated nucleic acid as disclosed herein comprising no more than 20%, such as no more than 15% such as no more than 10%, of nucleotides which have 2' modifications that are not 2’-OMe modifications on the first and/or second strand.
One aspect is a conjugated nucleic acid as disclosed herein, wherein the number of nucleotides in the first and/or second strand with a 2’-modification that is not a 2’-OMe modification is no more than 7, more preferably no more than 5, and most preferably no more than 3.
One aspect is a conjugated nucleic acid as disclosed herein comprising no more than 20%, (such as no more than 15% or no more than 10%) of 2’-F modifications on the first and/or second strand.
One aspect is a conjugated nucleic acid as disclosed herein, wherein the number of nucleotides in the first and/or second strand with a 2’-F modification is no more than 7, more preferably no more than 5, and most preferably no more than 3.
One aspect is a conjugated nucleic acid as disclosed herein, wherein all nucleotides are modified with a 2’-OMe modification except positions 2 and 14 from the 5’ end of the first strand and the nucleotides on the second strand which correspond to position 11 , or 13, or 11 and 13, or 11-13 of the first strand. Preferably the nucleotides that are not modified with 2’-OMe are modified with fluoro at the 2’ position (2’-F modification).
Preferably, all nucleotides of the conjugated nucleic acid are modified at the 2’ position of the sugar. Preferably, these nucleotides are modified with a 2’-F modification where the modification is not a 2’-OMe modification. In one aspect the nucleic acid of the conjugated nucleic acid is modified on the first strand with alternating 2’-OMe modifications and 2-F modifications, and positions 2 and 14 (starting from the 5’ end) are modified with 2’-F. Preferably, the second strand is modified with 2’-F modifications at nucleotides on the second strand which correspond to position 11, or 13, or 11 and 13, or 11-13 of the first strand. Preferably, the second strand is modified with 2’-F modifications at positions 11-13 counting from the 3’ end starting at the first position of the complementary (double-stranded) region, and the remaining modifications are naturally occurring modifications, preferably 2’-OMe. The complementary region at least in this case starts at the first position of the second strand that has a corresponding nucleotide in the first strand, regardless of whether the two nucleotides are able to base pair to each other.
In one aspect of the conjugated nucleic acid, each of the nucleotides of the first strand and of the second strand is a modified nucleotide.
Unless specifically stated otherwise herein, the nucleotides of the first strand are numbered contiguously starting with nucleotide number 1 at the 5’ end of the first strand. Nucleotides of the second strand are numbered contiguously starting with nucleotide number 1 at the 3’ end of the second strand.
An “odd numbered” nucleotide is a nucleotide numbered with an odd number in a strand in which the nucleotides are numbered contiguously starting either from the indicated end or from the 5’ end of the strand if the end from which the nucleotides are numbered is not indicated. An “even numbered” nucleotide is a nucleotide numbered with an even number in a strand in which the nucleotides are numbered contiguously starting either from the indicated end or from the 5’ end of the strand if the end from which the nucleotides are numbered is not indicated.
One or more nucleotides on the first and/or second strand may be modified, to form modified nucleotides. One or more of the odd-numbered nucleotides of the first strand may be modified. One or more of the even-numbered nucleotides of the first strand may be modified by at least a second modification, wherein the at least second modification is different from the modification on the one or more odd nucleotides. At least one of the one or more modified even numbered-nucleotides may be adjacent to at least one of the one or more modified odd- numbered nucleotides.
A plurality of odd-numbered nucleotides in the first strand may be modified in the nucleic acid of the invention. A plurality of even-numbered nucleotides in the first strand may be modified by a second modification. The first strand may comprise adjacent nucleotides that are modified by a common modification. The first strand may also comprise adjacent nucleotides that are modified by a second different modification (i.e. , the first strand may comprise nucleotides that are adjacent to each other and modified by a first modification as well as other nucleotides that are adjacent to each other and modified by a second modification that is different to the first modification).
One or more of the odd-numbered nucleotides of the second strand (wherein the nucleotides are numbered contiguously starting with nucleotide number 1 at the 3’ end of the second strand) may be modified by a modification that is different to the modification of the odd- numbered nucleotides on the first strand (wherein the nucleotides are numbered contiguously starting with nucleotide number 1 at the 5’ end of the first strand) and/or one or more of the even-numbered nucleotides of the second strand may be modified by the same modification of the odd-numbered nucleotides of the first strand. At least one of the one or more modified even-numbered nucleotides of the second strand may be adjacent to the one or more modified odd-numbered nucleotides. A plurality of odd-numbered nucleotides of the second strand may be modified by a common modification and/or a plurality of even-numbered nucleotides may be modified by the same modification that is present on the first stand odd-numbered nucleotides. A plurality of odd-numbered nucleotides on the second strand may be modified by a modification that is different from the modification of the first strand odd-numbered nucleotides.
The second strand may comprise adjacent nucleotides that are modified by a common modification, which may be a modification that is different from the modification of the odd- numbered nucleotides of the first strand.
In the conjugated nucleic acids of the invention, each of the odd-numbered nucleotides in the first strand and each of the even-numbered nucleotides in the second strand may be modified with a common modification and, each of the even-numbered nucleotides may be modified in the first strand with a different modification and each of the odd-numbered nucleotides may be modified in the second strand with the different modification.
The conjugated nucleic acid of the invention may have the modified nucleotides of the first strand shifted by at least one nucleotide relative to the unmodified or differently modified nucleotides of the second strand.
One or more or each of the odd numbered-nucleotides may be modified in the first strand and one or more or each of the even-numbered nucleotides may be modified in the second strand. One or more or each of the alternating nucleotides on either or both strands may be modified by a second modification. One or more or each of the even-numbered nucleotides may be modified in the first strand and one or more or each of the even-numbered nucleotides may be modified in the second strand. One or more or each of the alternating nucleotides on either or both strands may be modified by a second modification. One or more or each of the odd- numbered nucleotides may be modified in the first strand and one or more of the odd- numbered nucleotides may be modified in the second strand by a common modification. One or more or each of the alternating nucleotides on either or both strands may be modified by a second modification. One or more or each of the even-numbered nucleotides may be modified in the first strand and one or more or each of the odd-numbered nucleotides may be modified in the second strand by a common modification. One or more or each of the alternating nucleotides on either or both strands may be modified by a second modification.
The conjugated nucleic acid of the invention may comprise single- or double-stranded constructs that comprise at least two regions of alternating modifications in one or both of the strands. These alternating regions can comprise up to about 12 nucleotides but preferably comprise from about 3 to about 10 nucleotides. The regions of alternating nucleotides may be located at the termini of one or both strands of the nucleic acid of the invention. The nucleic acid may comprise from 4 to about 10 nucleotides of alternating nucleotides at each of the termini (3' and 5') and these regions may be separated by from about 5 to about 12 contiguous unmodified or differently or commonly modified nucleotides.
The odd numbered nucleotides of the first strand may be modified and the even numbered nucleotides may be modified with a second modification. The second strand may comprise adjacent nucleotides that are modified with a common modification, which may be the same as the modification of the odd-numbered nucleotides of the first strand. One or more nucleotides of the second strand may also be modified with the second modification. One or more nucleotides with the second modification may be adjacent to each other and to nucleotides having a modification that is the same as the modification of the odd-numbered nucleotides of the first strand. The first strand may also comprise phosphorothioate linkages between the two nucleotides at the 3’ end and at the 5’ end or a phosphorodithioate linkage between the two nucleotides at the 3’ end. The second strand may comprise a phosphorothioate or phosphorodithioate linkage between the two nucleotides at the 5’ end. The second strand may also be conjugated to a ligand at the 5’ end.
The conjugated nucleic acid of the invention may comprise a first strand comprising adjacent nucleotides that are modified with a common modification. One or more such nucleotides may be adjacent to one or more nucleotides which may be modified with a second modification. One or more nucleotides with the second modification may be adjacent. The second strand may comprise adjacent nucleotides that are modified with a common modification, which may be the same as one of the modifications of one or more nucleotides of the first strand. One or more nucleotides of the second strand may also be modified with the second modification. One or more nucleotides with the second modification may be adjacent. The first strand may also comprise phosphorothioate linkages between the two nucleotides at the 3’ end and at the 5’ end or a phosphorodithioate linkage between the two nucleotides at the 3’ end. The second strand may comprise a phosphorothioate or phosphorodithioate linkage between the two nucleotides at the 3’ end. The second strand may also be conjugated to a ligand at the 5’ end.
The nucleotides numbered from 5' to 3' on the first strand and 3' to 5' on the second strand, 1, 3, 5, 7, 9, 11, 13, 15, 17, 19, 21, 23 and 25 may be modified by a modification on the first strand. The nucleotides numbered 2, 4, 6, 8, 10, 12, 14, 16, 18, 20, 22 and 24 may be modified by a second modification on the first strand. The nucleotides numbered 1, 3, 5, 7, 9, 11, 13, 15, 17, 19, 21, 23 may be modified by a modification on the second strand. The nucleotides numbered 2, 4, 6, 8, 10, 12, 14, 16, 18, 20, 22 and 24 may be modified by a second modification on the second strand. Nucleotides are numbered for the sake of the nucleic acid of the present invention from 5' to 3' on the first strand and 3' to 5' on the second strand.
The nucleotides numbered 2, 4, 6, 8, 10, 12, 14, 16, 18, 20, 22 and 24 may be modified by a modification on the first strand. The nucleotides numbered 1, 3, 5, 7, 9, 11, 13, 15, 17, 19, 21 , 23 may be modified by a second modification on the first strand. The nucleotides numbered 1, 3, 5, 7, 9, 11, 13, 15, 17, 19, 21, 23 may be modified by a modification on the second strand. The nucleotides numbered 2, 4, 6, 8, 10, 12, 14, 16, 18, 20, 22 and 24 may be modified by a second modification on the second strand.
Clearly, if the first and/or the second strand are shorter than 25 nucleotides in length, such as 19 nucleotides in length, there are no nucleotides numbered 20, 21, 22, 23, 24 and 25 to be modified. The skilled person understands the description above to apply to shorter strands, accordingly.
One or more modified nucleotides on the first strand may be paired with modified nucleotides on the second strand having a common modification. One or more modified nucleotides on the first strand may be paired with modified nucleotides on the second strand having a different modification. One or more modified nucleotides on the first strand may be paired with unmodified nucleotides on the second strand. One or more modified nucleotides on the second strand may be paired with unmodified nucleotides on the first strand. In other words, the alternating nucleotides can be aligned on the two strands such as, for example, all the modifications in the alternating regions of the second strand are paired with identical modifications in the first strand or alternatively the modifications can be offset by one nucleotide with the common modifications in the alternating regions of one strand pairing with dissimilar modifications (i.e. a second or further modification) in the other strand. Another option is to have dissimilar modifications in each of the strands.
The modifications on the first strand may be shifted by one nucleotide relative to the modified nucleotides on the second strand, such that common modified nucleotides are not paired with each other.
The modification and/or modifications may each and individually be selected from the group consisting of 3' terminal deoxy thymine, 2'-OMe, a 2' deoxy modification, a 2' amino modification, a 2' alkyl modification, a morpholino modification, a phosphoramidate modification, 5'-phosphorothioate group modification, a 5' phosphate or 5' phosphate mimic modification and a cholesteryl derivative or a dodecanoic acid bisdecylamide group modification and/or the modified nucleotide may be any one of a locked nucleotide, an abasic nucleotide or a non-natural base comprising nucleotide.
At least one modification may be 2'-OMe and/or at least one modification may be 2'-F. Further modifications as described herein may be present on the first and/or second strand.
The nucleic acid of the invention may comprise an inverted RNA nucleotide at one or several of the strand ends. Such inverted nucleotides provide stability to the nucleic acid. Preferably, the nucleic acid comprises at least an inverted nucleotide at the 3’ end of the first and/or the second strand and/or at the 5’ end of the second strand. More preferably, the nucleic acid comprises an inverted nucleotide at the 3’ end of the second strand. Most preferably, the nucleic acid comprises an inverted RNA nucleotide at the 3’ end of the second strand and this nucleotide is preferably an inverted A. An inverted nucleotide is a nucleotide that is linked to the 3’ end of a nucleic acid through its 3’ carbon, rather than its 5’ carbon as would normally be the case or is linked to the 5’ end of a nucleic acid through its 5’ carbon, rather than its 3’ carbon as would normally be the case. The inverted nucleotide is preferably present at an end of a strand not as an overhang but opposite a corresponding nucleotide in the other strand. Accordingly, the nucleic acid is preferably blunt-ended at the end that comprises the inverted RNA nucleotide. An inverted RNA nucleotide being present at the end of a strand preferably means that the last nucleotide at this end of the strand is the inverted RNA nucleotide. A nucleic acid with such a nucleotide is stable and easy to synthesise. The inverted RNA nucleotide is preferably an unmodified nucleotide in the sense that it does not comprise any modifications compared to the natural nucleotide counterpart. Specifically, the inverted RNA nucleotide is preferably a 2’-OH nucleotide.
Conjugated nucleic acids of the invention may comprise one or more nucleotides modified at the 2’ position with a 2’-H, and therefore having a DNA nucleotide within the nucleic acid. Nucleic acids of the invention may comprise DNA nucleotides at positions 2 and/or 14 of the first strand counting from the 5’ end of the first strand. Nucleic acids may comprise DNA nucleotides on the second strand which correspond to position 11, or 13, or 11 and 13, or 11- 13 of the first strand.
In one aspect there is no more than one DNA nucleotide per nucleic acid of the invention.
Conjugated nucleic acids of the invention may comprise one or more LNA nucleotides. Nucleic acids of the invention may comprise LNA nucleotides at positions 2 and/or 14 of the first strand counting from the 5’ end of the first strand. Nucleic acids may comprise LNA on the second strand which correspond to position 11, or 13, or 11 and 13, or 11-13 of the first strand.
Some representative modified nucleic acid sequences of the present invention are shown in the examples. These examples are meant to be representative and not limiting.
Preferably, the nucleic acid portion of the conjugated nucleic acid may comprise a first modification and a second or further modification which are each and individually selected from the group comprising 2'-OMe modification and 2'-F modification. The nucleic acid may comprise a modification that is 2'-OMe that may be a first modification, and a second modification that is 2'-F. The nucleic acid of the invention may also include a phosphorothioate or phosphorodithioate modification and/or a deoxy modification which may be present in or between the terminal 2 or 3 nucleotides of each or any end of each or both strands.
In one aspect of the conjugated nucleic acid, at least one nucleotide of the first and/or second strand is a modified nucleotide, wherein if the first strand comprises at least one modified nucleotide:
(i) at least one or both of the nucleotides 2 and 14 of the first strand is/are modified by a first modification; and/or
(ii) at least one, several, or all the even-numbered nucleotides of the first strand is/are modified by a first modification; and/or (iii) at least one, several, or all the odd-numbered nucleotides of the first strand is/are modified by a second modification; and/or wherein if the second strand comprises at least one modified nucleotide:
(iv) at least one, several, or all the nucleotides of the second strand in a position corresponding to an even-numbered nucleotide of the first strand is/are modified by a third modification; and/or
(v) at least one, several, or all the nucleotides of the second strand in a position corresponding to an odd-numbered nucleotide of the first strand is/are modified by a fourth modification; and/or
(vi) at least one, several, or all the nucleotides of the second strand in a position corresponding to nucleotide 11 or nucleotide 13 or nucleotides 11 and 13 or nucleotides 11-13 of the first strand is/are modified by a fourth modification; and/or
(vii) at least one, several, or all the nucleotides of the second strand in a position other than the position corresponding to nucleotide 11 or nucleotide 13 or nucleotides 11 and 13 or nucleotides 11-13 of the first strand is/are modified by a third modification; wherein the nucleotides on the first strand are numbered consecutively starting with nucleotide number 1 at the 5’ end of the first strand; wherein the modifications are preferably at least one of the following:
(a) the first modification is preferably different from the second and from the third modification;
(b) the first modification is preferably the same as the fourth modification;
(c) the second and the third modification are preferably the same modification;
(d) the first modification is preferably a 2’-F modification;
(e) the second modification is preferably a 2’-OMe modification;
(f) the third modification is preferably a 2’-OMe modification; and/or
(g) the fourth modification is preferably a 2’-F modification.
The 3' and 5' ends of an oligonucleotide can be modified. Such modifications can be at the 3' end or the 5' end or both ends of the molecule. They can include modification or replacement of an entire terminal phosphate or of one or more of the atoms of the phosphate group. For example, the 3' and 5' ends of an oligonucleotide can be conjugated to other functional molecular entities such as labelling moieties, e.g., fluorophores (e.g., pyrene, TAMRA, fluorescein, Cy3 or Cy5 dyes) or protecting groups (based e.g., on sulfur, silicon, boron or ester). The functional molecular entities can be attached to the sugar through a phosphate group and/or a linker. The terminal atom of the linker can connect to or replace the linking atom of the phosphate group or the C-3' or C-5' O, N, S or C group of the sugar. Alternatively, the linker can connect to or replace the terminal atom of a nucleotide surrogate (e.g., PNAs). These spacers or linkers can include e.g., — (CH2)n — , — (CH2)nN — , — (CH2)nO — , — (CH2)nS — , — (CH2CH20)nCH2CH20 — (e.g., n=3 or 6), abasic sugars, amide, carboxy, amine, oxyamine, oxyimine, thioether, disulfide, thiourea, sulfonamide, or morpholino, or biotin and fluorescein reagents. The 3' end can be an — OH group.
Other examples of terminal modifications include dyes, intercalating agents (e.g., acridines), cross-linkers (e.g., psoralene, mitomycin C), porphyrins (TPPC4, texaphyrin, Sapphyrin), polycyclic aromatic hydrocarbons (e.g., phenazine, dihydrophenazine), artificial endonucleases, EDTA, lipophilic carriers (e.g., cholesterol, cholic acid, adamantane acetic acid, 1 -pyrene butyric acid, dihydrotestosterone, 1,3-Bis-0(hexadecyl)glycerol, geranyloxyhexyl group, hexadecylglycerol, borneol, menthol, 1,3-propanediol, heptadecyl group, palmitic acid, myristic acid, 03-(oleoyl)lithocholic acid, 03-(oleoyl)cholenic acid, dimethoxytrityl, or phenoxazine) and peptide conjugates (e.g., antennapedia peptide, Tat peptide), alkylating agents, phosphate, amino, mercapto, PEG (e.g., PEG-40K), MPEG, [MPEG]2, polyamino, alkyl, substituted alkyl, radiolabeled markers, enzymes, haptens (e.g., biotin), transport/absorption facilitators (e.g., aspirin, vitamin E, folic acid), synthetic ribonucleases (e.g., imidazole, bisimidazole, histamine, imidazole clusters, acridine-imidazole conjugates, Eu3+ complexes of tetraazamacrocycles).
Terminal modifications can also be useful for monitoring distribution, and in such cases the groups to be added may include fluorophores, e.g., fluorescein or an Alexa dye. Terminal modifications can also be useful for enhancing uptake, useful modifications for this include cholesterol. Terminal modifications can also be useful for cross-linking an RNA agent to another moiety.
Terminal modifications can be added for a number of reasons, including to modulate activity or to modulate resistance to degradation. Terminal modifications useful for modulating activity include modification of the 5' end with phosphate or phosphate analogues. Nucleic acids of the invention, on the first or second strand, may be 5' phosphorylated or include a phosphoryl analogue at the 5' prime terminus. 5'-phosphate modifications include those which are compatible with RISC mediated gene silencing. Suitable modifications include: 5'- monophosphate ((H0)2(0) P—O-5'); 5'-diphosphate ((H0)2(0)P— O— P(H0)(0)— 0-5'); 5'- triphosphate (( H O) 2(0) P — O — ( H O) (O) P — O — P ( H O) (O) — O- 5 ') ; 5'-guanosine cap (7- methylated or non-methylated) (7m-G-0-5'-(H0)(0)P — O — (H0)(0)P — O — P(H0)(0) — 0-5'); 5'-adenosine cap (Appp), and any modified or unmodified nucleotide cap structure (N — 0-5'- (H0)(0)P — O — (H0)(0)P — O — P(H0)(0) — 0-5'); 5'-monothiophosphate (phosphorothioate; (HO)2(S)P — 0-5'); 5'-monodithiophosphate (phosphorodithioate; (HO)(HS)(S)P — 0-5'), 5'- phosphorothiolate ((H0)2(0)P — S-5'); any additional combination of oxygen/sulfur replaced monophosphate, diphosphate and triphosphates (e.g., 5'-alpha-thiotriphosphate, 5'-gamma- thiotriphosphate, etc.), 5'-phosphoramidates ((HO)2(0)P— NH-5', (HO)(NH2)(0)P— 0-5'), 5'- alkylphosphonates (alkyl=methyl, ethyl, isopropyl, propyl, etc., e.g., RP(OH)(0) — 0-5'- (wherein R is an alkyl), (0H)2(0)P-5'-CH2-), 5' vinylphosphonate, 5-alkyletherphosphonates (alkylether=methoxymethyl (MeOCH2-), ethoxymethyl, etc., e.g., RP(0H)(0) — 0-5'-) (wherein R is an alkylether)).
Certain moieties may be linked to the 5' terminus of the first strand or the second strand. These include abasic ribose moiety, abasic deoxyribose moiety, modifications abasic ribose and abasic deoxyribose moieties including 2 -0 alkyl modifications; inverted abasic ribose and abasic deoxyribose moieties and modifications thereof, C6-imino-Pi; a mirror nucleotide including L-DNA and L-RNA; 5'OMe nucleotide; and nucleotide analogues including 4', 5'- methylene nucleotide; 1-^-D-erythrofuranosyl)nucleotide; 4'-thio nucleotide, carbocyclic nucleotide; 5'-amino-alkyl phosphate; 1,3-diamino-2-propyl phosphate, 3-aminopropyl phosphate; 6-aminohexyl phosphate; 12-aminododecyl phosphate; hydroxypropyl phosphate; 1,5-anhydrohexitol nucleotide; alpha-nucleotide; threo-pentofuranosyl nucleotide; acyclic 3', 4'- seco nucleotide; 3, 4-di hydroxy butyl nucleotide; 3,5-dihydroxypentyl nucleotide, 5'-5'-inverted abasic moiety; 1 ,4-butanediol phosphate; 5'-amino; and bridging or non-bridging methylphosphonate and 5'-mercapto moieties.
In each sequence described herein, a C-terminal “-OH” moiety may be substituted for a C- terminal “-NH2” moiety, and vice-versa.
The invention also provides a conjugated nucleic acid according to any aspect of the invention described herein, wherein the nucleic acid has a terminal 5’ (E)-vinylphosphonate nucleotide at its 5’ end. When the conjugated nucleic acid has a first strand and a second strand, the first strand may have a terminal 5’ (E)-vinylphosphonate nucleotide at its 5’ end. The terminal 5’ (E)-vinylphosphonate nucleotide is preferably linked to the second nucleotide in the strand by a phosphodiester (PO) linkage.
The conjugated nucleic acid, in particular the first strand of the conjugated nucleic acid when the nucleic acid has a first strand and a second strand, may comprise formula (I):
(nr)-N(ro)[N(r0)]h- (I) where ‘(vp)-’ is the 5’ (E)-vinylphosphonate, ‘N’ is a nucleotide, ‘po’ is a phosphodiester linkage, and n is from 1 to (the total number of nucleotides in the first strand - 2), preferably wherein n is from 1 to (the total number of nucleotides in the first strand -3), more preferably wherein n is from 1 to (the total number of nucleotides in the first strand -4).
Preferably, the terminal 5’ (E)-vinylphosphonate nucleotide is an RNA nucleotide, preferably a (vp)-U. More preferably, the terminal 5’ (E)-vinylphosphonate nucleotide is a 2’OMe modified RNA nucleotide, such as (vp)-2’OMe-U. A terminal 5’ (E)-vinylphosphonate nucleotide is a nucleotide wherein the natural phosphate group at the 5’-end has been replaced with a (E)-vinylphosphonate, in which the bridging 5’- oxygen atom of the terminal nucleotide of the 5’ phosphorylated strand is replaced with a methynyl (-CH=) group:
Figure imgf000033_0001
Nucleotides with a natural phosphate Nucleotide with a E-vinylphosphonate at the 5’-end at the 5’-end
A 5’ (E)-vinylphosphonate is a 5’ phosphate mimic. A biological mimic is a molecule that is capable of carrying out the same function as and is structurally very similar to the original molecule that is being mimicked. In the context of the present invention, 5’ (E)- vinylphosphonate mimics the function of a normal 5’ phosphate, e.g. enabling efficient RISC loading. In addition, because of its slightly altered structure, 5’ (E) vinylphosphonate is capable of stabilizing the 5’-end nucleotide by protecting it from dephosphorylation by enzymes such as phosphatases.
In one aspect, the first strand has a terminal 5’ (E)-vinylphosphonate nucleotide at its 5’ end, the terminal 5’ (E)-vinylphosphonate nucleotide is linked to the second nucleotide in the first strand by a phosphodiester linkage and the first strand comprises a) more than 1 phosphodiester (PO) linkage; b) phosphodiester (PO) linkages between at least the terminal three 5’ nucleotides and/or c) phosphodiester (PO) linkages between at least the terminal four 5’ nucleotides.
In one aspect, the first strand and/or the second strand of the conjugated nucleic acid comprises at least one phosphorothioate (PS) internucleotide linkage. In one aspect, the first strand and/or the second strand of the nucleic acid comprises more than one phosphorothioate (PS) internucleotide linkages.
In one aspect, the first strand and/or the second strand of the conjugated nucleic acid comprises a phosphorothioate (PS) linkage between the terminal two or three 3’ nucleotides. Preferably, the linkages between the other nucleotides in the first strand and/or the second strand are phosphodiester (PO) linkages.
In one aspect, the first strand and/or the second strand of the conjugated nucleic acid comprises a phosphorothioate (PS) linkage between the terminal two 5’ nucleotides or phosphorothioate (PS) linkages between the terminal three 5’ nucleotides. Preferably, the linkages between the other nucleotides in the first strand and/or the second strand are phosphodiester (PO) linkages.
In one aspect, the conjugated nucleic acid of the present invention comprises one or more phosphorothioate (PS) internucleotide linkages on one or more of the terminal ends of the first and/or the second strand. Optionally, each or either end of the first strand may comprise one or two or three phosphorothioate (PS) internucleotide linkages. Optionally, each or either end of the second strand may comprise one or two or three phosphorothioate (PS) internucleotide linkages.
In one aspect, the conjugated nucleic acid comprises a phosphorothioate (PS) linkage between the terminal two or three 3’ nucleotides and/or 5’ nucleotides of the first and/or the second strand. Preferably, the nucleic acid comprises a phosphorothioate (PS) linkage between each of the terminal three 3’ nucleotides and the terminal three 5’ nucleotides of the first strand and of the second strand. Preferably, all remaining linkages between nucleotides of the first and/or of the second strand are phosphodiester (PO) linkages.
In one aspect, the nucleic acid comprises a phosphorothioate (PS) linkage between the terminal three 3’ nucleotides and the terminal three 5’ nucleotides of the first strand and of the second strand. Preferably, all remaining linkages between nucleotides of the first and/or of the second strand are phosphodiester (PO) linkages. In one aspect, the conjugated nucleic acid:
(i) has a phosphorothioate (PS) linkage between the terminal three 3’ nucleotides and the terminal three 5’ nucleotides of the first strand;
(ii) is conjugated to a triantennary ligand either on the 3’ end nucleotide or on the 5’ end nucleotide of the second strand;
(iii) has a phosphorothioate (PS) linkage between the terminal three nucleotides of the second strand at the end opposite to the one conjugated to the triantennary ligand; and
(iv) optionally all remaining linkages between nucleotides of the first and/or of the second strand are phosphodiester (PO) linkages.
In one aspect, the conjugated nucleic acid:
(i) has a terminal 5’ (E)-vinylphosphonate nucleotide at the 5’ end of the first strand;
(ii) has a phosphorothioate (PS) linkage between the terminal three 3’ nucleotides on the first and second strand and between the terminal three 5’ nucleotides on the second strand; and
(iii) optionally all remaining linkages between nucleotides of the first and/or of the second strand are phosphodiester (PS2) linkages.
In one aspect, the first strand and/or the second strand of the conjugated nucleic acid comprises at least one phosphorodithioate (PS2) internucleotide linkage. In one aspect, the first strand and/or the second strand of the nucleic acid comprises more than one phosphorodithioate (PS2) internucleotide linkages, such as two, three, four or five phosphorodithioate (PS2) internucleotide linkages.
In one aspect, the first strand and/or the second strand of the conjugated nucleic acid comprises a phosphorodithioate (PS2) linkage between the terminal two or three 3’ nucleotides. Preferably, the linkages between the other nucleotides in the first strand and/or the second strand are phosphodiester (PO) linkages.
In one aspect, the first strand and/or the second strand of the conjugated nucleic acid comprises a phosphorodithioate (PS2) linkage between the terminal two 5’ nucleotides or phosphorodithioate (PS2) linkages between the terminal three 5’ nucleotides. Preferably, the linkages between the other nucleotides in the first strand and/or the second strand are phosphodiester (PO) linkages. In one aspect, the conjugated nucleic acid of the present invention comprises one or more phosphorodithioate (PS2) internucleotide linkages on one or more of the terminal ends of the first and/or the second strand.
In one aspect, the conjugated nucleic acid comprises a phosphorodithioate (PS2) linkage between the terminal two or three 3’ nucleotides of the first and/or the second strand and/or between the terminal two or three 5’ nucleotides of the second strand. Preferably, the nucleic acid comprises a phosphorodithioate (PS2) linkage between each of the terminal two 3’ nucleotides of the first and the second strand and between the terminal two 5’ nucleotides of the second strand. Preferably, all remaining linkages between nucleotides of the first and/or of the second strand are phosphodiester (PO) linkages.
In one aspect, the conjugated nucleic acid comprises a phosphorodithioate (PS2) linkage between each of the two, three or four terminal nucleotides at the 3’ end of the first strand and/or comprises a phosphorodithioate (PS2) linkage between each of the two, three or four terminal nucleotides at the 3’ end of the second strand and/or a phosphorodithioate (PS2) linkage between each of the two, three or four terminal nucleotides at the 5’ end of the second strand, and wherein the nucleic acid comprises a linkage other than a phosphorodithioate (PS2) linkage between the two, three or four terminal nucleotides at the 5’ end of the first strand. Preferably, all internucleotide linkages in the first strand and/or the second strand that are not phosphorodithioate (PS2) internucleotide linkages are phosphodiester (PO) internucleotide linkages.
In one aspect, the conjugated nucleic acid comprises a phosphorodithioate (PS2) linkage between the two nucleotides at the 3’ end of the first strand and/or comprises a phosphorodithioate (PS2) linkage between the two terminal nucleotides at the 3’ end of the second strand and/or a phosphorodithioate (PS2) linkage between the two terminal nucleotides at the 5’ end of the second strand, and wherein the nucleic acid comprises a linkage other than a phosphorodithioate (PS2) linkage between the two, three or four terminal nucleotides at the 5’ end of the first strand. Preferably, all internucleotide linkages in the first strand and/or the second strand that are not phosphorodithioate (PS2) internucleotide linkages are phosphodiester (PO) internucleotide linkages.
In one aspect, the conjugated nucleic acid:
(i) has a phosphorodithioate (PS2) linkage between the terminal two 3’ nucleotides of the first strand; (ii) is conjugated to a triantennary ligand either on the 3’ end nucleotide or on the 5’ end nucleotide of the second strand;
(iii) has a phosphorodithioate (PS2) linkage between the terminal two nucleotides of the second strand at the end opposite to the one conjugated to the triantennary ligand or between the terminal two nucleotides at both ends of the strand; and
(iv) optionally all remaining linkages between nucleotides of the first and/or of the second strand are phosphodiester (PO) linkages.
In one aspect, the conjugated nucleic acid:
(i) has a terminal 5’ (E)-vinylphosphonate nucleotide at the 5’ end of the first strand;
(ii) has a phosphorodithioate (PS2) linkage between the terminal two 3’ nucleotides on the first and second strand and between the terminal two 5’ nucleotides on the second strand; and
(iii) optionally all remaining linkages between nucleotides of the first and/or of the second strand are phosphodiester (PO) linkages.
The use of a phosphorodithioate (PS2) linkage in the conjugated nucleic acids of the invention reduces the variation in the stereochemistry of a population of nucleic acid molecules compared to molecules comprising a phosphorothioate (PS) with undefined stereochemistry in that same position. Phosphorothioate (PS) linkages introduce chiral centres and it is difficult to control which non-linking oxygen is substituted for sulphur. The use of a phosphorodithioate (PS2) ensures that no chiral centre exists in that linkage and thus reduces or eliminates any variation in the population of nucleic acid molecules, depending on the number of phosphorodithioate (PS2) and phosphorothioate (PS) linkages used in the nucleic acid molecule.
In one aspect, the conjugated nucleic acid comprises a phosphorodithioate (PS2) linkage between the two terminal nucleotides at the 3’ end of the first strand and a phosphorodithioate (PS2) linkage between the two terminal nucleotides at the 3’ end of the second strand and a phosphorodithioate (PS2) linkage between the two terminal nucleotides at the 5’ end of the second strand and comprises a linkage other than a phosphorodithioate (PS2) linkage between the two, three or four terminal nucleotides at the 5’ end of the first strand. Preferably, the first strand has a terminal 5’ (E)-vinylphosphonate nucleotide at its 5’ end. This terminal 5’ (E)-vinylphosphonate nucleotide is preferably linked to the second nucleotide in the first strand by a phosphodiester (PO) linkage. Preferably, all the linkages between the nucleotides of both strands other than the linkage between the two terminal nucleotides at the 3’ end of the first strand and the linkages between the two terminal nucleotides at the 3’ end and at the 5’ end of the second strand are phosphodiester (PO) linkages.
In one aspect, the conjugated nucleic acid comprises a phosphorothioate (PS) linkage between each of the three terminal 3’ nucleotides and/or between each of the three terminal 5’ nucleotides on the first strand, and/or between each of the three terminal 3’ nucleotides and/or between each of the three terminal 5’ nucleotides of the second strand when there is no phosphorodithioate (PS2) linkage present at that end. No phosphorodithioate (PS2) linkage being present at an end means that the linkage between the two terminal nucleotides, or preferably between the three terminal nucleotides of the nucleic acid end in question are linkages other than phosphorodithioate (PS2) linkages.
In one aspect, all the linkages of the nucleic acid between the nucleotides of both strands other than the linkage between the two terminal nucleotides at the 3’ end of the first strand and the linkages between the two terminal nucleotides at the 3’ end and at the 5’ end of the second strand are phosphodiester (PO) linkages.
In one aspect, the entire nucleic acid, including any hybridised strand (such as the first strand and the second strand) and the ligand, is free of phosphorothioates (PS).
In one aspect:
(i) all internucleotide linkages in the nucleic acid (including the first strand and the second strand if the nucleic acid has a first and a second strand) are linkages other than phosphorothioates (PS) and are preferably phosphodiesters (PO) or phosphorodithioates (PS2);
(ii) all phosphate bonds in the ligand (or in all the ligands if the nucleic acid is conjugated to more than one ligand) are bonds other than phosphorothioates (PS), and are preferably phosphodiesters (PO) or phosphorodithioates (PS2);
(iii) all internucleotide linkages in the nucleic acid (including the first strand and the second strand if the nucleic acid has a first and a second strand) and all phosphate bonds in the ligand (or in all the ligands if the nucleic acid is conjugated to more than one ligand) are linkages or bonds other than phosphorothioates (PS), and are preferably phosphodiesters (PO) or phosphorodithioates (PS2); or
(iv) the nucleic acid is a siRNA and all internucleotide linkages in the siRNA are phosphodiesters (PO) or phosphorodithioates (PS2).
Other phosphate linkage modifications are possible. A phosphate linkage can also be modified by replacement of a linking oxygen with nitrogen (bridged phosphoroamidates), sulfur (bridged phosphorothioates) and carbon (bridged methylenephosphonates). The replacement can occur at a terminal oxygen. Replacement of the non-linking oxygens with nitrogen is possible.
The phosphate groups can also individually be replaced by non-phosphorus containing connectors.
Examples of moieties which can replace the phosphate group include siloxane, carbonate, carboxymethyl, carbamate, amide, thioether, ethylene oxide linker, sulfonate, sulfonamide, thioformacetal, formacetal, oxime, methyleneimino, methylenemethylimino, methylenehydrazo, methylenedimethylhydrazo and methyleneoxymethylimino. In certain embodiments, replacements may include the methylenecarbonylamino and methylenemethylimino groups.
The phosphate linkage and ribose sugar of a nucleotide may be replaced by nuclease resistant nucleotides. Examples include the morpholino, cyclobutyl, pyrrolidine and peptide nucleic acid (PNA) nucleotide surrogates. In certain embodiments, PNA surrogates may be used.
In one aspect, the conjugated nucleic acid, which is preferably an siRNA that inhibits expression of a target gene, preferably via RNAi, and preferably in a cell, comprises one or more or all of:
(i) a modified nucleotide;
(ii) a modified nucleotide other than a 2’-OMe modified nucleotide at positions 2 and 14 from the 5’ end of the first strand, preferably a 2’-F modified nucleotide;
(iii) each of the odd-numbered nucleotides of the first strand as numbered starting from one at the 5’ end of the first strand are 2’-OMe modified nucleotides;
(iv) each of the even-numbered nucleotides of the first strand as numbered starting from one at the 5’ end of the first strand are 2’-F modified nucleotides;
(v) the second strand nucleotide corresponding to position 11 and/or 13 or 11-13 of the first strand is modified by a modification other than a 2’-OMe modification, preferably wherein one or both or all of these positions comprise a 2’-F modification;
(vi) an inverted nucleotide, preferably a 3’-3’ linkage at the 3’ end of the second strand;
(vii) one or more phosphorothioate (PS) linkages;
(viii) one or more phosphorodithioate (PS2) linkages; and/or (ix) the first strand has a terminal 5’ (E)-vinylphosphonate nucleotide at its 5’ end, in which case the terminal 5’ (E)-vinylphosphonate nucleotide is preferably a uridine and is preferably linked to the second nucleotide in the first strand by a phosphodiester (PO) linkage.
All the features of the nucleic acids can be combined with all other aspects of the invention disclosed herein.
Ligands
The nucleic acids of the invention is conjugated to a ligand. Efficient delivery of oligonucleotides, in particular double-stranded nucleic acids, to cells in vivo is important and requires specific targeting and substantial protection from the extracellular environment, preferably serum proteins. One method of achieving specific targeting is to conjugate a ligand to the nucleic acid. In some embodiments, the ligand helps in targeting the nucleic acid to a target cell which has a cell surface receptor that binds to and internalises the conjugated ligand. In such embodiments, there is a need to conjugate appropriate ligands for the desired receptor molecules in order for the conjugated molecules to be taken up by the target cells by mechanisms such as different receptor-mediated endocytosis pathways or functionally analogous processes. In other embodiments, a ligand which can mediate internalization of the nucleic acid into a target cell by mechanisms other than receptor mediated endocytosis may alternatively be conjugated to a nucleic acid of the invention for cell or tissue specific targeting.
When the conjugated nucleic acid has a first strand (antisense strand) and a second strand (sense strand), the ligand can be conjugated to either one of the strands, preferably at the end of a strand, more particularly to the last nucleotide at one end of a strand. The ligand is preferably conjugated to the ribose of a nucleotides, preferably the last of a strand. The ligand can be conjugated to the ribose of a nucleotide, preferably the last on in a strand, via the 2’, 3’ or 5’ carbon of the ribose. Preferred are the 3’ or 5’ carbon. The ligand is preferably not conjugated to the 5’ end of the first strand. The ligand is preferably conjugated to the 5’ end of the second strand.
The ligand is preferably conjugated to the last nucleotide of a nucleic acid strand, preferably to the ribose moiety. The ligand can be conjugated to the first strand (the antisense strand) or the second strand (the antisense strand). Preferably, the ligand is conjugated to a nucleotide at the end of one of the strands of the nucleic acid, more preferably the nucleotide at the 3’ or 5’ end of the second (sense) strand. One example of a receptor mediated endocytosis mechanism of conjugates is the uptake of a conjugate via the asialoglycoprotein receptor complex (ASGP-R), which has high affinity to the GalNAc moiety described herein. The ASGP-R complex is composed of varying ratios of multimers of membrane ASGR1 and ASGR2 receptors, which are highly abundant on hepatocytes. One of the first disclosures of the use of triantennary cluster glycosides as conjugated ligands was in US patent number US 5,885,968. Conjugates having three GalNAc ligands and comprising phosphate groups are known and are described in Dubber et al. (Bioconjug. Chem. 2003 Jan-Feb;14(1):239-46.). The ASGP-R complex shows a 50-fold higher affinity for N-Acetyl-D-Galactosamine (GalNAc) than D-Gal.
The ASGP-R complex recognizes specifically terminal b-galactosyl subunits of glycosylated proteins or other oligosaccharides (Weigel, P.H. et. al., Biochim. Biophys. Acta. 2002 Sep 19;1572(2-3):341-63) and can be used for delivering a drug to the liver’s hepatocytes expressing the receptor complex by covalent coupling of galactose or galactosamine to the drug substance (Ishibashi.S. ; et. al., J Biol. Chem. 1994 Nov 11;269(45):27803-6). Furthermore, the binding affinity can be significantly increased by the multi-valency effect, which is achieved by the repetition of the targeting moiety (Biessen EA, et al., J Med Chem. 1995 Apr 28;38(9): 1538-46).
The ASGP-R complex is a mediator for an active uptake of terminal b-galactosyl containing glycoproteins to the cell’s endosomes. Thus, the ASGPR is highly suitable for targeted delivery of drug candidates conjugated to such ligands like, e.g., nucleic acids into receptor-expressing cells (Akinc et al., Mol Ther. 2010 Jul; 18(7): 1357-64).
More generally the ligand can comprise a saccharide that is selected to have an affinity for at least one type of receptor on a target cell. In particular, the receptor is on the surface of a mammalian liver cell, for example, the hepatic asialoglycoprotein receptor complex described before (ASGP-R).
Accordingly, the ligand of the conjugated nucleic acid preferably comprises at least one saccharide. The ligand is preferably selected from N-acetyl galactosamine (GalNAc), mannose, galactose, glucose, glucosamine and fucose, more preferably at least one N-acetyl galactosamine (GalNAc).
Preferably, the ligand of the conjugated nucleic acid comprises:
(i) at least one N-acetyl galactosamine (GalNAc); and (ii) a linker, wherein the linker conjugates the at least one N-acetyl galactosamine (GalNAc) to the nucleic acid.
The linker may be a monovalent structure or bivalent or trivalent or tetravalent branched structure.
In one aspect, the ligand of the conjugated nucleic acid is a compound of formula (II):
[S-X1-P-X2]3-A-X3- (II) wherein:
S represents a saccharide, preferably wherein the saccharide is N-acetyl galactosamine (GalNAc);
X1 represents C3-C6 alkylene or (-CH2-CH2-0)m(-CH2)2- wherein m is 1, 2, or 3;
P is independently in each instance a phosphodiester (PO) or a modified phosphate, preferably a phosphorodithioate (PS2);
X2 is a Ci-Cs alkylene or an alkylene ether of the formula (-Chb O-Chb- where n = 1- 6; A is a branching unit;
X3 represents a bridging unit; wherein X3 is conjugated to the nucleic acid via a phosphodiester (PO) or a modified phosphate, preferably a phosphorodithioate (PS2).
In formula (II), the branching unit “A” preferably branches into three in order to accommodate three saccharide ligands. The branching unit is preferably covalently attached to the remaining tethered portions of the ligand and the nucleic acid. The branching unit may comprise a branched aliphatic group comprising groups selected from alkyl, amide, disulphide, polyethylene glycol, ether, thioether and hydroxyamino groups. The branching unit may comprise groups selected from alkyl and ether groups.
The branching unit A may have a structure selected from:
Figure imgf000042_0001
wherein each Ai independently represents O, S, C=0 or NH; and each n independently represents an integer from 1 to 20. The branching unit may have a structure selected from:
Figure imgf000043_0001
wherein each Ai independently represents O, S, C=0 or NH; and each n independently represents an integer from 1 to 20.
The branching unit may have a structure selected from:
Figure imgf000043_0002
wherein Ai is O, S, C=0 or NH; and each n independently represents an integer from 1 to 20. The branching unit may have the structure:
Figure imgf000043_0003
The branching unit may have the structure:
Figure imgf000043_0004
The branching unit may have the structure:
Figure imgf000043_0005
Alternatively, the branching unit A may have a structure selected from:
Figure imgf000044_0001
wherein:
R1 is hydrogen or C1-C10 alkylene; and R2 is C1-C10 alkylene.
Optionally, the branching unit consists of only a carbon atom.
The “X3” portion is a bridging unit. The bridging unit is linear and is covalently bound to the branching unit and the nucleic acid.
X3 may be selected from -C1-C20 alkylene-, -C2-C20 alkenylene-, an alkylene ether of formula - (C1-C20 alkylene)-0-(Ci-C2o alkylene)-, -C(0)-Ci-C2o alkylene-, -C0-C4 alkylene(Cy)Co-C4 alkylene- wherein Cy represents a substituted or unsubstituted 5 or 6 membered cycloalkylene, arylene, heterocyclylene or heteroarylene ring, -C1-C4 alkylene-NHC(0)-Ci-C4 alkylene-, -Ci- C4 alkylene-C(0)NH-Ci-C4 alkylene-, -C1-C4 alkylene-SC(0)-Ci-C4 alkylene-, -C1-C4 alkylene- C(0)S-Ci-C4 alkylene-, -C1-C4 alkylene-0C(0)-Ci-C4 alkylene-, -C1-C4 alkylene-C(0)0-Ci-C4 alkylene-, and -CrCe alkylene-S-S-Ci-C6 alkylene-.
X3 may be an alkylene ether of formula -(C1-C20 alkylene)-0-(Ci-C2o alkylene)-. X3 may be an alkylene ether of formula -(C1-C20 alkylene)-0-(C4-C2o alkylene)-, wherein said (C4-C20 alkylene) is linked to Z. X3 may, preferably when A consists of only a carbon atom, be selected from the group consisting of -CH2-O-C3H6-, -CH2-O-C4H8-, -CH2-O-C6H12- and -CH2-O-C8H16-, especially -CH2-O-C4H8-, -CH2-O-C6H12- and -CH2-O-C8H16-, wherein in each case the -CH2- group is linked to A.
In one aspect, the ligand of the conjugated nucleic acid is a compound of formula (III):
[S-X1-P-X2]3-A-X3- (III) wherein: S represents a saccharide, preferably wherein the saccharide is N-acetyl galactosamine (GalNAc);
X1 represents C3-C6 alkylene or (-CH2-CH2-0)m(-CH2)2- wherein m is 1, 2, or 3;
P is independently in each instance a phosphodiester (PO) or a modified phosphate, preferably a phosphorodithioate (PS2);
X2 is Ci-Cs alkylene;
A is a branching unit selected from:
Figure imgf000045_0001
X3 is a bridging unit; wherein X3 is conjugated to the nucleic acid via a phosphodiester (PO) or a modified phosphate, preferably a phosphorodithioate (PS2).
The branching unit A may have the structure:
Figure imgf000045_0002
The branching unit A may have the structure:
Figure imgf000045_0003
, wherein X3 is attached to the nitrogen atom.
X3 may be C1-C20 alkylene. Preferably, X3 is selected from the group consisting of -C3H6-, - C4H8-, -C6H12- and -OdHΐd-, especially -C4H8-,-C6Hi2- and -C8H16-.
In one aspect, the ligand of the conjugated nucleic acid is a compound of formula (IV):
[S-X1-P-X2]3-A-X3- (IV) wherein:
S represents a saccharide, preferably wherein the saccharide is N-acetyl galactosamine (GalNAc);
X1 represents C3-C6 alkylene or (-CH2-CH2-0)m(-CH2)2- wherein m is 1, 2, or 3; P is independently in each instance a phosphodiester (PO) or a modified phosphate, preferably a phosphorodithioate (PS2);
X2 is a Ci-Cs alkylene or an alkylene ether of the formula (-CH2)n-0-CH2- where n = 1- 6; A is a branching unit;
X3 is an alkylene ether of formula selected from the group consisting of -CH2-0-CH2-, -
CH2-0-C2H4-, -CH2-O-C3H6-, -CH2-O-C4H8-, -CH2-O-C5H10-, -CH2-O-C6H12-, -CH2-O-
C7HM-, and -0H2-0-0dHΐ6-, wherein in each case the -CH2- group is linked to A, wherein X3 is conjugated to the nucleic acid via a phosphodiester (PO) or a modified phosphate, preferably a phosphorodithioate (PS2).
The branching unit may comprise carbon. Preferably, the branching unit is a carbon.
X3 may be selected from the group consisting of -CH2-0-C4H8-, -CH2-0-C5HIO-, -0H2-0-0dHi2- , -CH2-0-C7HI4-, and -0H2-0-0dHΐ6-. Preferably, X3 is selected from the group consisting of - CH2-0-C4HS-, -0H2-0-0dHi2- and -CH2-0-C8Hi6.
X1 may be (-CH2-CH2-0)(-CH2)2-. X1 may be (-CH2-CH2-0)2(-CH2)2-. X1 may be (-CH2-CH2- 0)3(-CH2)2-. Preferably, X1 is (-CH2-CH2-0)2(-CH2)2-. Alternatively, X1 represents C3-C6 alkylene. X1 may be propylene. X1 may be butylene. X1 may be pentylene. X1 may be hexylene. Preferably, the alkyl is a linear alkylene. In particular, X1 may be butylene.
X2 represents an alkylene ether of formula -C3H6-0-CH2- i.e. C3 alkoxy methylene, or - CH2CH2CH2OCH2-.
For any of the above aspects, when P represents a modified phosphate group, P can be represented by:
Figure imgf000046_0001
wherein Y1 and Y2 each independently represent =0, =S, -O , -OH, -SH, -BH3, -0CH2C02, -
0CH2C02Rx, -OCH2C(S)ORx, and -ORx, wherein Rx represents C1-C6 alkyl and wherein H indicates attachment to the remainder of the compound.
By modified phosphate it is meant a phosphate group wherein one or more of the non-linking oxygens is replaced. Examples of modified phosphate groups include phosphorothioate (PS), phosphorodithioates (PS2), phosphoroselenates, borano phosphates, borano phosphate esters, hydrogen phosphonates, phosphoroamidates, alkyl or aryl phosphonates and phosphotriesters. Phosphorothioates (PS) have one of the non-linking oxygens of a phosphate group replaced by sulphur. Phosphorodithioates (PS2) have both non-linking oxygens of a phosphate group replaced by sulphur. One, each or both non-linking oxygens in the phosphate group can be independently any one of S, Se, B, C, H, N, or OR (R is alkyl or aryl).
The phosphate can also be modified by replacement of a linking oxygen with nitrogen (bridged phosphoroamidates), sulfur (bridged phosphorothioates) and carbon (bridged methylenephosphonates). The replacement can occur at a terminal oxygen. Replacement of the non-linking oxygens with nitrogen is possible.
For example, Y1 may represent -OH and Y2 may represent =0 or =S; or Y1 may represent -O and Y2 may represent =0 or =S;
Y1 may represent =0 and Y2 may represent -CH3, -SH, -ORx, or -BH3 Y1 may represent =S and Y2 may represent -CH3, ORx or -SH.
It will be understood by the skilled person that in certain instances there will be delocalisation between Y1 and Y2.
Preferably, the modified phosphate group is a thiophosphate group. Thiophosphate groups include phosphorodithioates (i.e., where Y1 represents =S and Y2 represents -S ) and phosphorothioate (i.e., where Y1 represents -O and Y2 represents =S, or where Y1 represents =0 and Y2 represents -S ). The inventors have found that conjugates having thiophosphate groups in replacement of phosphate groups potentially have improved potency and/or duration of action in vivo. In addition, when the modified phosphate is a phosphorodithioate (PS2) the conjugates have fewer stereocentres as compared to a counterpart in which the modified phosphate is a phosphorothioate (PS) with an undefined stereocentre.
P may also be an ethylphosphate (i.e. where Y1 represents =0 and Y2 represents OCH2CH3).
The saccharide may be selected to have an affinity for at least one type of receptor on a target cell. In particular, the receptor is on the surface of a mammalian liver cell, for example, the hepatic asialoglycoprotein receptor complex (ASGP-R).
In a ligand of any of formula (II), (III) or (IV) or in any one of the triantennary ligands disclosed herein:
(i) each P is independently a phosphodiester (PO) or a phosphorodithioate (PS2); and/or (ii) at least one P is a phosphorodithioate (PS2).
Preferably, at least two P of formula (II), (III) or (IV) are phosphorodithioates (PS2) and most preferably all P are phosphorodithioates (PS2).
Any of the ligands are preferably conjugated to the nucleic acid via a phosphorodithioate (PS2). The PS2 that links the ligand to the nucleic acid is preferably directly linked to the 2’, 3’ or 5’ carbon of the ribose of a nucleotide of the nucleic acid, preferably of a terminal nucleotide, i.e. the nucleotide at one of the ends of the nuclei acid. When the ligand is conjugated to the nucleic acid via a phosphorodithioate (PS2) attached on a carbon of the last nucleotide of a nucleic acid strand, said nucleotide is preferably linked to the next nucleotide in the nucleic acid strand via a linkage other than a phosphorodithioate (PS2), such as a phosphodiester (PO) or a phosphorothioate (PS), preferably a phosphodiester (PO).
The higher the number of phosphorodithioates (PS2) in the ligand, including in the position between the ligand and the nucleic acid, the easier purification from building blocks during synthesis may be, as sulfur atoms have a higher mass than the oxygen atoms they replace. On aggregate, the more phosphorodithioate (PS2) linkages there are in the ligand, the larger the mass differential to the building blocks and incomplete synthesis products will be.
For any of the above or below aspects, the saccharide S may be selected from N-acetyl with one or more of galactosamine, mannose, galactose, glucose, glucosamine and fructose. Typically a ligand to be used in the present invention may include N-acetyl galactosamine (GalNAc). Preferably, the compounds of the invention may have 3 saccharides, which are each preferably N-acetyl galactosamine (GalNAc).
"GalNAc" refers to 2-(Acetylamino)-2-deoxy-D-galactopyranose, commonly referred to in the literature as N-acetyl galactosamine. Reference to “GalNAc” or “N-acetyl galactosamine” includes both the b- form: 2-(Acetylamino)-2-deoxy^ -D-galactopyranose and the a-form: 2- (Acetylamino)-2-deoxy-a-D- galactopyranose. In certain embodiments, both the b-form: 2- (Acetylamino)-2-deoxy^-D-galactopyranose and a-form: 2-(Acetylamino)-2-deoxy-a-D- galactopyranose may be used interchangeably. Preferably, the compounds of the invention comprise the b-form, 2-(Acetylamino)-2-deoxy^-D-galactopyranose.
Figure imgf000048_0001
2-(Acetylamino)-2-deoxy-D-galactopyranose
Figure imgf000049_0002
2-(Acetylamino)-2-deoxy-a-D-galactopyranose
In one aspect of the conjugated nucleic acid, the ligand, including the linkage to the nucleic acid (the linkage between X3 and the nucleic acid in formulae (II), (III) and (IV)), is selected from:
Figure imgf000049_0001
Figure imgf000050_0001
Figure imgf000051_0001
For each of these, the ligand is attached via the phosphorothioate (PO) or phosphorodithioate (PS2) on the right end of each formula to the nucleic acid. The phosphorothioate (PO) or phosphorodithioate (PS2) is preferably attached to the 2’, 3’ or 5’ carbon of the ribose of a nucleotide. Preferably, it is attached to the 2’, 3’ or 5’ carbon of the ribose of a terminal nucleotide.
A ligand of formula (II), (III) or (IV) or any one of the triantennary ligands disclosed herein can be attached at the 3’-end of the first (antisense) strand and/or at any of the 3’ and/or 5’ end of the second (sense) strand. The conjugated nucleic acid can comprise more than one ligand of formula (II), (III) or (IV) or any one of the triantennary ligands disclosed herein. However, a single ligand of formula (II), (III) or (IV) or any one of the triantennary ligands disclosed herein is preferred because a single such ligand is sufficient for efficient targeting of the nucleic acid to the target cells. Preferably, the 5’-end of the first (antisense) strand is not attached to a ligand of formula (II), (III) or (IV) or any one of the triantennary ligands disclosed herein, since a ligand in this position can potentially interfere with the biological activity of the nucleic acid.
A nucleic acid with a single ligand of formula (II), (III) or (IV) or any one of the triantennary ligands disclosed herein at the 5’ end of a strand is easier and therefore cheaper to synthesise than the same nucleic acid with the same ligand at the 3’ end. Preferably therefore, a single ligand of any of formulae (II), (III) or (IV) or any one of the triantennary ligands disclosed herein is covalently attached to (conjugated with) the 5’ end of the second strand of the nucleic acid, preferably to the 5’ carbon of the ribose of the last nucleotide of the nucleic acid.
In one aspect of the conjugated nucleic acid, the cells that are targeted by the nucleic acid with a ligand are hepatocytes.
In any one of the above ligands where GalNAc is present, the GalNAc may be substituted for any other targeting ligand, such as those mentioned herein, preferably mannose, galactose, glucose, glucosamine and fucose.
In one aspect, the nucleic acid is conjugated to a ligand that comprises a lipid, and more preferably, a ligand that comprises a cholesterol.
Compositions, uses and methods
The present invention also provides compositions comprising a conjugated nucleic acid of the invention. The conjugated nucleic acids and compositions may be used as medicaments or as diagnostic agents, alone or in combination with other agents. For example, one or more conjugated nucleic acid(s) of the invention can be combined with a delivery vehicle (e.g., liposomes) and/or excipients, such as carriers, diluents. Other agents such as preservatives and stabilizers can also be added. Pharmaceutically acceptable salts or solvates of any of the nucleic acids of the invention are likewise within the scope of the present invention. Methods for the delivery of nucleic acids are known in the art and within the knowledge of the person skilled in the art.
Compositions disclosed herein are preferably pharmaceutical compositions. Such compositions are suitable for administration to a subject. In one aspect, the composition comprises a conjugated nucleic acid disclosed herein, or a pharmaceutically acceptable salt or solvate thereof, and a solvent (preferably water) and/or a delivery vehicle and/or a physiologically acceptable excipient and/or a carrier and/or a salt and/or a diluent and/or a buffer and/or a preservative.
In one aspect, the composition comprises a plurality of conjugated nucleic acids disclosed herein, preferably a plurality of a single species of a conjugated nucleic acid disclosed herein. The composition therefore comprises a plurality of the same conjugated nucleic acid. Preferably:
(i) the composition is, or is essentially, stereopure;
(ii) all stereocentres of all, or of essentially all, of the ligands of said plurality of conjugated nucleic acids have the same stereochemical conformation;
(iii) all stereocentres of all, or of essentially all, of the nucleic acids of said plurality of conjugated nucleic acids have the same stereochemical conformation; and/or
(iv) all stereocentres of all, or of essentially all, of said plurality of conjugated nucleic acids have the same stereochemical conformation.
A composition that is stereopure is a composition in which all, or essentially all, of the components of the composition, such as conjugated nucleic acids, have the same stereochemical conformation in all, or essentially all, of their stereocentres. This can for example be achieved by replacing al the undefined stereocentres, such as phosphorothioate (PS) linkages by linkages that do not have a stereocentre, such as phosphodiester (PO) or phosphorodithioate (PS2) linkages.
A plurality is to be understood as two or more, three or more, four or more, five or more, 10 or more, 100 or more, but can also be understood as a very large number such as several thousands, several million, several billion or more.
“Essentially” in the context of this inventions is preferably to be understood as 70% or more, 75% or more, 80% or more, 85% or more, 90% or more, 95% or more, 96% or more, 97% or more, 98% or more, 99% or more, 99.5% or more, 99.6% or more, 99.7% or more, 99.8% or more, 99.9% or more, or 99.99% or more. Preferably, any degradation products, incomplete synthesis products or any other impurities are not to be counted.
Pharmaceutically acceptable carriers or diluents include those used in formulations suitable for oral, rectal, nasal or parenteral (including subcutaneous, intramuscular, intravenous, intradermal, and transdermal) administration. The formulations may conveniently be presented in unit dosage form and may be prepared by any of the methods well known in the art of pharmacy. Subcutaneous or transdermal modes of administration may be preferably suitable for the compounds described herein.
The therapeutically effective amount of a conjugated nucleic acid of the present invention will depend on the route of administration, the type of mammal being treated, and the physical characteristics of the specific mammal under consideration. These factors and their relationship to determining this amount are well known to skilled practitioners in the medical arts. This amount and the method of administration can be tailored to achieve optimal efficacy, and may depend on such factors as weight, diet, concurrent medication and other factors, well known to those skilled in the medical arts. The dosage sizes and dosing regimen most appropriate for human use may be guided by the results obtained by the present invention, and may be confirmed in properly designed clinical trials.
An effective dosage and treatment protocol may be determined by conventional means, starting with a low dose in laboratory animals and then increasing the dosage while monitoring the effects, and systematically varying the dosage regimen as well. Numerous factors may be taken into consideration by a clinician when determining an optimal dosage for a given subject. Such considerations are known to the skilled person.
Conjugated nucleic acids of the present invention, or salts thereof, may be formulated as pharmaceutical compositions prepared for storage or administration, which typically comprise a therapeutically effective amount of a nucleic acid of the invention, or a salt thereof, in a pharmaceutically acceptable carrier.
The conjugated nucleic acids or compositions of the present invention can also be administered in combination with other therapeutic compounds, either administrated separately or simultaneously, e.g., as a combined unit dose. The invention also includes a composition comprising one or more conjugated nucleic acids according to the present invention in a physiologically/pharmaceutically acceptable excipient, such as a stabilizer, preservative, diluent, buffer, and the like.
In one aspect, the composition comprises a conjugated nucleic acid disclosed herein and a further therapeutic agent selected from the group comprising an oligonucleotide, a small molecule, a monoclonal antibody, a polyclonal antibody, a peptide and a protein. In certain embodiments, two or more conjugated nucleic acids of the invention with different sequences may be administered simultaneously or sequentially.
In another aspect, the present invention provides a composition, e.g., a pharmaceutical composition, comprising one or a combination of different conjugated nucleic acids of the invention and at least one pharmaceutically acceptable carrier.
Dosage levels for the medicaments and compositions of the invention can be determined by those skilled in the art by experimentation. In one aspect, a unit dose may contain between about 0.01 mg/kg and about 100 mg/kg body weight of conjugated nucleic acid. Alternatively, the dose can be from 10 mg/kg to 25 mg/kg body weight, or 1 mg/kg to 10 mg/kg body weight, or 0.05 mg/kg to 5 mg/kg body weight, or 0.1 mg/kg to 5 mg/kg body weight, or 0.1 mg/kg to1 mg/kg body weight, or 0.1 mg/kg to 0.5 mg/kg body weight, or 0.5 mg/kg to 1 mg/kg body weight. Alternatively, the dose can be from about 0.5 mg/kg to about 10 mg/kg body weight, or about 0.6 mg/kg to about 8 mg/kg body weight, or about 0.7 mg/kg to about 7 mg/kg body weight, or about 0.8 mg/kg to about 6 mg/kg body weight, or about 0.9 mg/kg to about 5.5 mg/kg body weight, or about 1 mg/kg to about 5 mg/kg body weight, or about 2 mg/kg to about 5 mg/kg body weight, or about 3 mg/kg to about 5 mg/kg body weight, or about 1 mg/kg body weight, or about 3 mg/kg body weight, or about 5 mg/kg body weight, wherein “about” is a deviation of up to 30%, preferably up to 20%, more preferably up to 10%, yet more preferably up to 5% and most preferably 0% from the indicated value. Dosage levels may also be calculated via other parameters such as, e.g., body surface area.
The dosage and frequency of administration may vary depending on whether the treatment is therapeutic or prophylactic (e.g., preventative), and may be adjusted during the course of treatment. In certain prophylactic applications, a relatively low dosage is administered at relatively infrequent intervals over a relatively long period of time. Some subjects may continue to receive treatment over their lifetime. In certain therapeutic applications, a relatively high dosage at relatively short intervals is sometimes required until progression of the disease is reduced or until the patient shows partial or complete amelioration of symptoms of disease. Thereafter, the patient may be switched to a suitable prophylactic dosing regimen.
Actual dosage levels of a conjugated nucleic acid of the invention alone or in combination with one or more other active ingredients in the pharmaceutical compositions of the present invention may be varied so as to obtain an amount of the active ingredient which is effective to achieve the desired therapeutic response for a particular patient, composition, and mode of administration, without causing deleterious side effects to the subject or patient. A selected dosage level will depend upon a variety of factors, such as pharmacokinetic factors, including the activity of the particular nucleic acid or composition employed, the route of administration, the time of administration, the rate of excretion of the particular nucleic acid being employed, the duration of the treatment, other drugs, compounds and/or materials used in combination with the particular compositions employed, the age, sex, weight, condition, general health and prior medical history of the subject or patient being treated, and similar factors well known in the medical arts.
The pharmaceutical composition may be a sterile injectable aqueous suspension or solution, or in a lyophilised form.
The pharmaceutical compositions can be in unit dosage form. In such form, the composition is divided into unit doses containing appropriate quantities of the active component. The unit dosage form can be a packaged preparation, the package containing discrete quantities of the preparations, for example, packeted tablets, capsules, and powders in vials or ampoules. The unit dosage form can also be a capsule, cachet, or tablet itself, or it can be the appropriate number of any of these packaged forms. It may be provided in single dose injectable form, for example in the form of a pen. Compositions may be formulated for any suitable route and means of administration.
The pharmaceutical compositions and medicaments of the present invention may be administered to a mammalian subject in a pharmaceutically effective dose. The mammal may be selected from a human, a non-human primate, a simian or prosimian, a dog, a cat, a horse, cattle, a pig, a goat, a sheep, a mouse, a rat, a hamster, a hedgehog and a guinea pig, or other species of relevance.
Pharmaceutical compositions of the invention may be administered alone or in combination with one or more other therapeutic or diagnostic agents. A combination therapy may include a conjugated nucleic acid of the present invention combined with at least one other therapeutic agent selected based on the particular patient, disease or condition to be treated. Examples of other such agents include, inter alia, a therapeutically active small molecule or polypeptide, a single chain antibody, a classical antibody or fragment thereof, or a nucleic acid molecule which modulates gene expression of one or more additional genes, and similar modulating therapeutics which may complement or otherwise be beneficial in a therapeutic or prophylactic treatment regimen. Pharmaceutical compositions are typically sterile and stable under the conditions of manufacture and storage. The composition may be formulated as a solution, microemulsion, liposome, or other ordered structure suitable to high drug concentration. The carrier may be a solvent or dispersion medium containing, for example, water, alcohol such as ethanol, polyol (e.g., glycerol, propylene glycol, and liquid polyethylene glycol), or any suitable mixtures. The proper fluidity may be maintained, for example, by the use of a coating such as lecithin, by the maintenance of the required particle size in the case of dispersion and by use of surfactants according to formulation chemistry well known in the art. In certain embodiments, isotonic agents, e.g., sugars, polyalcohols such as mannitol, sorbitol, or sodium chloride may be desirable in the composition. Prolonged absorption of injectable compositions may be brought about by including in the composition an agent that delays absorption for example, monostearate salts and gelatine.
One aspect of the invention is a conjugated nucleic acid or a composition disclosed herein for use as a medicament. The conjugated nucleic acid or composition is preferably for use in the prevention, decrease of the risk of suffering from, or treatment of a disease that can be treated by decreasing the expression of the gene targeted by the nucleic acid.
Preventing, decreasing the risk of suffering from or treating a disease may mean that the underlying cause of the disease is being addressed. In such a case treatment with a conjugated nucleic acid or a composition disclose herein may lead to a cure. Preventing, decreasing the risk of suffering from or treating a disease may also be limited to at least partially alleviating or ameliorating one or more symptoms of the disease.
The present invention provides a conjugated nucleic acid for use, alone or in combination with one or more additional therapeutic agents in a pharmaceutical composition, for treatment or prophylaxis of conditions, diseases and disorders responsive to inhibition of the target gene that is targeted by the nucleic acid of the conjugated nucleic acid.
One aspect of the invention is the use of a nucleic acid or a composition as disclosed herein in the prevention, decrease of the risk of suffering from, or treatment of a disease that can be treated by decreasing the expression of the gene targeted by the nucleic acid.
One aspect of the invention is the use of a conjugated nucleic acid or a composition as disclosed herein in a method of inhibiting the expression the gene targeted by the nucleic acid in a cell, preferably in vitro. One aspect of the invention is a method of inhibiting the expression of the gene targeted by a conjugated nucleic acid disclosed herein in a cell, preferably in vitro, comprising a step of administering a conjugated nucleic acid or a composition as disclosed herein to cells, preferably in vitro.
Conjugated nucleic acids and pharmaceutical compositions of the invention may be used in the treatment of a variety of conditions, disorders or diseases. Treatment with a conjugated nucleic acid or composition of the invention preferably leads to in vivo target gene mRNA and/or protein depletion, preferably in the liver. As such, conjugated nucleic acids of the invention, and compositions comprising them, will be useful in methods for treating a variety of pathological disorders in which inhibiting the expression of the target gene may be beneficial. Such methods comprise a step of administering to a subject in need thereof a therapeutically effective amount of a conjugated nucleic acid of the invention.
The invention thus provides methods of treatment or prevention of a disorder, the method comprising the step of administering to a subject (e.g., a patient) in need thereof a therapeutically effective amount of a conjugated nucleic acid or pharmaceutical composition comprising a conjugated nucleic acid of the invention.
The most desirable therapeutically effective amount is an amount that will produce a desired efficacy of a particular treatment selected by one of skill in the art for a given subject in need thereof. This amount will vary depending upon a variety of factors understood by the skilled worker, including but not limited to the characteristics of the therapeutic compound (including activity, pharmacokinetics, pharmacodynamics, and bioavailability), the physiological condition of the subject (including age, sex, disease type and stage, general physical condition, responsiveness to a given dosage, and type of medication), the nature of the pharmaceutically acceptable carrier or carriers in the formulation, and the route of administration. One skilled in the clinical and pharmacological arts will be able to determine a therapeutically effective amount through experimentation, namely by monitoring a subject's response to administration of a compound and adjusting the dosage accordingly. See, e.g., Remington: The Science and Practice of Pharmacy 21st Ed., Univ. of Sciences in Philadelphia (USIP), Lippincott Williams & Wlkins, Philadelphia, PA, 2005.
In certain embodiments, conjugated nucleic acids and pharmaceutical compositions of the invention may be used to treat or prevent a disorder. In certain embodiments, the present invention provides methods for treating disorder in a mammalian subject, such as a human, the method comprising the step of administering to a subject in need thereof a therapeutically effective amount of a conjugated nucleic acid or composition as disclosed herein.
Administration of a "therapeutically effective dosage" of a nucleic acid of the invention may result in a decrease in severity of disease symptoms, an increase in frequency and duration of disease symptom-free periods, or a prevention of impairment or disability due to the disease affliction.
Conjugated nucleic acids of the invention may be beneficial in treating or diagnosing a disorder that may be diagnosed or treated using the methods described herein. Treatment and diagnosis of disorders are also considered to fall within the scope of the present invention.
One aspect of the invention is a method of preventing, decreasing the risk of suffering from, or treating a disorder, comprising administering a pharmaceutically effective dose or amount of a conjugated nucleic acid or a composition disclosed herein to an individual in need of treatment, preferably wherein the nucleic acid or composition is administered to the subject subcutaneously, intravenously or by oral, rectal, pulmonary, intramuscular or intraperitoneal administration. Preferably, it is administered subcutaneously.
It is evident that an appropriate dosage regimen of a conjugated nucleic acid or composition is necessary to achieve these outcomes. The skilled person will be able to determine the dosage regimen necessary to achieve these outcomes.
A conjugated nucleic acid or compositions disclosed herein may be for use in a regimen comprising treatments once or twice weekly, every week, every two weeks, every three weeks, every four weeks, every five weeks, every six weeks, every seven weeks, every eight weeks, every nine weeks, every ten weeks, every eleven weeks, every twelve weeks, every three months, every four months, every five months, every six months or in regimens with varying dosing frequency such as combinations of the before-mentioned intervals. The conjugated nucleic acid or composition may be for use subcutaneously, intravenously or using any other application routes such as oral, rectal, pulmonary, intramuscular or intraperitoneal. Preferably, it is for use subcutaneously.
An exemplary treatment regime is administration once every two weeks, once every three weeks, once every four weeks, once a month, once every two or three months or once every three, four, five or six or more months. Dosages may be selected and readjusted by the skilled health care professional as required to maximize therapeutic benefit for a particular subject, e.g., patient. The conjugated nucleic acids will typically be administered on multiple occasions. Intervals between single dosages can be, for example, 2-5 days, weekly, bi-weekly, monthly, every two or three months, every four or five months, every six months, or yearly. Intervals between administrations can also be irregular, based on nucleic acid target gene product levels for example in the liver of the subject or patient.
One aspect is the use of a conjugated nucleic acid or composition as disclosed herein in the manufacture of a medicament for treating a disorder. A medicament is a pharmaceutical composition.
Each of the conjugated nucleic acids of the invention and pharmaceutically acceptable salts and solvates thereof constitutes an individual embodiment of the invention.
Also included in the invention is a method of treating or preventing a disorder, comprising administration of a composition comprising a conjugated nucleic acid or composition as described herein, to an individual in need of treatment (to improve such pathologies). The conjugated nucleic acid or composition may be administered in a regimen comprising treatments twice every week, once every week, every two weeks, every three weeks, every four weeks, every five weeks, every six weeks, every seven weeks, or every eight to twelve or more weeks or in regimens with varying dosing frequency such as combinations of the before- mentioned intervals. The conjugated nucleic acid or composition may be for use subcutaneously or intravenously or other application routes such as oral, rectal or intraperitoneal.
A conjugated nucleic acid or composition of the invention may be administered by any appropriate administration pathway known in the art, including but not limited to aerosol, enteral, nasal, ophthalmic, oral, parenteral, rectal, vaginal, or transdermal (e.g., topical administration of a cream, gel or ointment, or by means of a transdermal patch). "Parenteral administration” is typically associated with injection at or in communication with the intended site of action, including infraorbital, infusion, intraarterial, intracapsular, intracardiac, intradermal, intramuscular, intraperitoneal, intrapulmonary, intraspinal, intrasternal, intrathecal, intrauterine, intravenous, subarachnoid, subcapsular, subcutaneous, transmucosal, or transtracheal administration. The use of a chemical modification pattern of the conjugated nucleic acids confers nuclease stability in serum and makes for example subcutaneous application route feasible.
Solutions or suspensions used for intradermal or subcutaneous application typically include one or more of: a sterile diluent such as water for injection, saline solution, fixed oils, polyethylene glycols, glycerine, propylene glycol or other synthetic solvents; antibacterial agents such as benzyl alcohol or methyl parabens; antioxidants such as ascorbic acid or sodium bisulfite; chelating agents such as ethylenediaminetetraacetic acid; buffers such as acetates, citrates or phosphates; and/or tonicity adjusting agents such as, e.g., sodium chloride or dextrose. The pH can be adjusted with acids or bases, such as hydrochloric acid or sodium hydroxide, or buffers with citrate, phosphate, acetate and the like. Such preparations may be enclosed in ampoules, disposable syringes or multiple dose vials made of glass or plastic.
Sterile injectable solutions may be prepared by incorporating a conjugated nucleic acid in the required amount in an appropriate solvent with one or a combination of ingredients described above, as required, followed by sterilization microfiltration. Dispersions may be prepared by incorporating the active compound into a sterile vehicle that contains a dispersion medium and optionally other ingredients, such as those described above. In the case of sterile powders for the preparation of sterile injectable solutions, the methods of preparation are vacuum drying and freeze-drying (lyophilization) that yield a powder of the active ingredient in addition to any additional desired ingredient from a sterile-filtered solution thereof.
When a therapeutically effective amount of a conjugated nucleic acid of the invention is administered by, e.g., intravenous, cutaneous or subcutaneous injection, the nucleic acid will be in the form of a pyrogen-free, parenterally acceptable aqueous solution. Methods for preparing parenterally acceptable solutions, taking into consideration appropriate pH, isotonicity, stability, and the like, are within the skill in the art. A preferred pharmaceutical composition for intravenous, cutaneous, or subcutaneous injection will contain, in addition to a nucleic acid, an isotonic vehicle such as sodium chloride injection, Ringer's injection, dextrose injection, dextrose and sodium chloride injection, lactated Ringer's injection, or other vehicle as known in the art. A pharmaceutical composition of the present invention may also contain stabilizers, preservatives, buffers, antioxidants, or other additives well known to those of skill in the art.
The amount of conjugated nucleic acid which can be combined with a carrier material to produce a single dosage form will vary depending on a variety of factors, including the subject being treated, and the particular mode of administration. In general, it will be an amount of the composition that produces an appropriate therapeutic effect under the particular circumstances. Generally, out of one hundred percent, this amount will range from about 0.01% to about 99% of nucleic acid, from about 0.1% to about 70%, or from about 1% to about 30% of nucleic acid in combination with a pharmaceutically acceptable carrier.
The conjugated nucleic acid may be prepared with carriers that will protect the compound against rapid release, such as a controlled release formulation, including implants, transdermal patches, and microencapsulated delivery systems. Biodegradable, biocompatible polymers can be used, such as ethylene vinyl acetate, polyanhydrides, polyglycolic acid, collagen, polyorthoesters, and polylactic acid. Many methods for the preparation of such formulations are patented or generally known to those skilled in the art. See, e.g., Sustained and Controlled Release Drug Delivery Systems, J. R. Robinson, ed., Marcel Dekker, Inc., New York, 1978.
Dosage regimens may be adjusted to provide the optimum desired response (e.g., a therapeutic response). For example, a dose may be administered, several divided doses may be administered over time, or the dose may be proportionally reduced or increased as indicated by the particular circumstances of the therapeutic situation, on a case by case basis. It is especially advantageous to formulate parenteral compositions in dosage unit forms for ease of administration and uniformity of dosage when administered to the subject or patient. As used herein, a dosage unit form refers to physically discrete units suitable as unitary dosages for the subjects to be treated; each unit containing a predetermined quantity of active compound calculated to produce a desired therapeutic effect. The specification for the dosage unit forms of the invention depend on the specific characteristics of the active compound and the particular therapeutic effect(s) to be achieved and the treatment and sensitivity of any individual patient.
The conjugated nucleic acid or composition of the present invention can be produced using routine methods in the art including chemical synthesis, such as solid phase chemical synthesis.
Conjugated nucleic acids or compositions of the invention may be administered with one or more of a variety of medical devices known in the art. For example, in one embodiment, a nucleic acid of the invention may be administered with a needleless hypodermic injection device. Examples of well-known implants and modules useful in the present invention are in the art, including e.g., implantable micro-infusion pumps for controlled rate delivery; devices for administering through the skin; infusion pumps for delivery at a precise infusion rate; variable flow implantable infusion devices for continuous drug delivery; and osmotic drug delivery systems. These and other such implants, delivery systems, and modules are known to those skilled in the art.
In certain embodiments, the conjugated nucleic acid or composition of the invention may be formulated to ensure a desired distribution in vivo. To target a therapeutic compound or composition of the invention to a particular in vivo location, they can be formulated, for example, in liposomes which may comprise one or more moieties that are selectively transported into specific cells or organs, thus enhancing targeted drug delivery.
The invention is characterized by high specificity at the molecular and tissue-directed delivery level. The sequences of the conjugated nucleic acids of the invention are highly specific for their target, meaning that they do not inhibit the expression of genes that they are not designed to target or only minimally inhibit the expression of genes that they are not designed to target and/or only inhibit the expression of a low number of genes that they are not designed to target. A further level of specificity is achieved when nucleic acids are linked to a ligand that is specifically recognised and internalised by a particular cell type. This is for example the case when a nucleic acid is linked to a ligand comprising GalNAc moieties, which are specifically recognised and internalised by hepatocytes. This leads to the nucleic acid inhibiting the expression of their target only in the cells that are targeted by the ligand to which they are linked. These two levels of specificity potentially confer a better safety profile than the currently available treatments. In certain embodiments, the present invention thus provides nucleic acids of the invention linked to a ligand comprising one or more GalNAc moieties, or comprising one or more other moieties that confer cell-type or tissue-specific internalisation of the nucleic acid thereby conferring additional specificity of target gene knockdown by RNA interference.
The conjugated nucleic acid as described herein may be formulated with a lipid in the form of a liposome. Such a formulation may be described in the art as a lipoplex. The composition with a lipid/liposome may be used to assist with delivery of the conjugated nucleic acid of the invention to the target cells. The lipid delivery system herein described may be used as an alternative to a conjugated ligand or in addition.
Such a lipoplex may comprise a lipid composition comprising: i) a cationic lipid, or a pharmaceutically acceptable salt thereof; ii) a steroid; iii) a phosphatidylethanolamine phospholipid; and/or iv) a PEGylated lipid. The cationic lipid may be an amino cationic lipid.
The content of the cationic lipid component may be from about 55 mol% to about 65 mol% of the overall lipid content of the composition. Preferably, the cationic lipid component is about 59 mol% of the overall lipid content of the composition.
The compositions can further comprise a steroid. The steroid may be cholesterol. The content of the steroid may be from about 26 mol% to about 35 mol% of the overall lipid content of the lipid composition. More preferably, the content of steroid may be about 30 mol% of the overall lipid content of the lipid composition.
The phosphatidylethanolamine phospholipid may be selected from the group consisting of 1,2- diphytanoyl-sn-glycero-3-phosphoethanolamine (DPhyPE), 1 ,2-dioleoyl-sn-glycero-3- phosphoethanolamine (DOPE), 1,2-distearoyl-sn-glycero-3-phosphoethanolamine (DSPE),
1.2-Dilauroyl-sn-glycero-3-phosphoethanolamine (DLPE), 1 ,2-Dimyristoyl-sn-glycero-3- phosphoethanolamine (DMPE), 1 ,2-Dipalmitoyl-sn-glycero-3-phosphoethanolamine (DPPE),
1.2-Dilinoleoyl-sn-glycero-3-phosphoethanolamine (DLoPE), 1-Palmitoyl-2-oleoyl-sn-glycero- 3-phosphoethanolamine (POPE), 1,2-Dierucoyl-sn-glycero-3-phosphoethanolamine (DEPE),
1.2-Disqualeoyl-sn-glycero-3-phosphoethanolamine (DSQPE) and 1-Stearoyl-2-linoleoyl-sn- glycero-3-phosphoethanolamine (SLPE). The content of the phospholipid may be about 10 mol% of the overall lipid content of the composition.
The PEGylated lipid may be selected from the group consisting of 1,2-dimyristoyl-sn-glycerol, methoxypolyethylene glycol (DMG-PEG) and C16-Ceramide-PEG. The content of the PEGylated lipid may be about 1 to 5 mol% of the overall lipid content of the composition.
The content of the cationic lipid component in the composition may be from about 55 mol% to about 65 mol% of the overall lipid content of the lipid composition, preferably about 59 mol% of the overall lipid content of the lipid composition.
The composition may have a molar ratio of the components of i):ii): iii): iv) selected from 55:34:10:1; 56:33:10:1; 57:32:10:1; 58:31:10:1 ; 59:30:10:1; 60:29:10:1 ; 61:28:10:1; 62:27:10:1; 63:26:10:1; 64:25:10:1 ; and 65:24:10:1.
Neutral liposome compositions may be formed from, for example, dimyristoyl phosphatidylcholine (DMPC) or dipalmitoyl phosphatidylcholine (DPPC). Anionic liposome compositions may be formed from dimyristoyl phosphatidylglycerol, while anionic fusogenic liposomes may be formed primarily from dioleoyl phosphatidylethanolamine (DOPE). Another type of liposomal composition may be formed from phosphatidylcholine (PC) such as, for example, soybean PC, and egg PC. Another type is formed from mixtures of phospholipid and/or phosphatidylcholine and/or cholesterol.
A positively charged synthetic cationic lipid, N-[1-(2,3-dioleyloxy)propyl]-N,N,N- trimethylammonium chloride (DOTMA) can be used to form small liposomes that interact spontaneously with nucleic acid to form lipid-nucleic acid complexes which are capable of fusing with the negatively charged lipids of the cell membranes of tissue culture cells. DOTMA analogues can also be used to form liposomes.
Derivatives and analogues of lipids described herein may also be used to form liposomes.
A liposome containing a conjugated nucleic acid can be prepared by a variety of methods. In one example, the lipid component of a liposome is dissolved in a detergent so that micelles are formed with the lipid component. For example, the lipid component can be an amphipathic cationic lipid or lipid conjugate. The detergent can have a high critical micelle concentration and may be nonionic. Exemplary detergents include cholate, CHAPS, octylglucoside, deoxycholate, and lauroyl sarcosine. The conjugated nucleic acid preparation is then added to the micelles that include the lipid component. The cationic groups on the lipid interact with the nucleic acid and condense around the nucleic acid to form a liposome. After condensation, the detergent is removed, e.g., by dialysis, to yield a liposomal preparation of conjugated nucleic acid.
If necessary, a carrier compound that assists in condensation can be added during the condensation reaction, e.g., by controlled addition. For example, the carrier compound can be a polymer other than a conjugated nucleic acid (e.g., spermine or spermidine). pH can also be adjusted to favour condensation.
Conjugated nucleic acid formulations of the present invention may include a surfactant. In one embodiment, the conjugated nucleic acid is formulated as an emulsion that includes a surfactant.
A surfactant that is not ionized is a non-ionic surfactant. Examples include non-ionic esters, such as ethylene glycol esters, propylene glycol esters, glyceryl esters etc., nonionic alkanolamides, and ethers such as fatty alcohol ethoxylates, propoxylated alcohols, and ethoxylated/propoxylated block polymers. A surfactant that carries a negative charge when dissolved or dispersed in water is an anionic surfactant. Examples include carboxylates, such as soaps, acyl lactylates, acyl amides of amino acids, esters of sulfuric acid such as alkyl sulfates and ethoxylated alkyl sulfates, sulfonates such as alkyl benzene sulfonates, acyl isethionates, acyl taurates and sulfosuccinates, and phosphates.
A surfactant that carries a positive charge when dissolved or dispersed in water is a cationic surfactant. Examples include quaternary ammonium salts and ethoxylated amines.
A surfactant that has the ability to carry either a positive or negative charge is an amphoteric surfactant. Examples include acrylic acid derivatives, substituted alkylamides, N-alkylbetaines and phosphatides.
"Micelles" are defined herein as a particular type of molecular assembly in which amphipathic molecules are arranged in a spherical structure such that all the hydrophobic portions of the molecules are directed inward, leaving the hydrophilic portions in contact with the surrounding aqueous phase. The converse arrangement exists if the environment is hydrophobic. A micelle may be formed by mixing an aqueous solution of the nucleic acid, an alkali metal alkyl sulphate, and at least one micelle forming compound.
Exemplary micelle forming compounds include lecithin, hyaluronic acid, pharmaceutically acceptable salts of hyaluronic acid, glycolic acid, lactic acid, chamomile extract, cucumber extract, oleic acid, linoleic acid, linolenic acid, monoolein, monooleates, monolaurates, borage oil, evening of primrose oil, menthol, trihydroxy oxo cholanyl glycine and pharmaceutically acceptable salts thereof, glycerol, polyglycerol, lysine, polylysine, triolein, polyoxyethylene ethers and analogues thereof, polidocanol alkyl ethers and analogues thereof, chenodeoxycholate, deoxycholate, and mixtures thereof.
Phenol and/or m-cresol may be added to the mixed micellar composition to act as a stabiliser and preservative. An isotonic agent such as glycerine may as be added.
A conjugated nucleic acid preparation may be incorporated into a particle such as a microparticle. Microparticles can be produced by spray-drying, lyophilisation, evaporation, fluid bed drying, vacuum drying, or a combination of these methods. Definitions
As used herein, the terms “inhibit”, “down-regulate”, or “reduce” with respect to gene expression mean that the expression of the gene, or the level of RNA molecules or equivalent RNA molecules encoding one or more proteins or protein subunits (e.g., mRNA), or the activity of one or more proteins or protein subunits, is reduced below that observed either in the absence of the nucleic acid or conjugated nucleic acid of the invention or as compared to that obtained with an siRNA molecule with no known homology to the human transcript (herein termed non-silencing control). Such control may be conjugated and modified in an analogous manner to the molecule of the invention and delivered into the target cell by the same route. The expression after treatment with the nucleic acid of the invention may be reduced to 95%, 90%, 80%, 70%, 60%, 50%, 40%, 30%, 20%, 15%, 10%, 5% or 0% or to intermediate values, or less than that observed in the absence of the nucleic acid or conjugated nucleic acid. The expression may be measured in the cells to which the nucleic acid is applied. Alternatively, especially if the nucleic acid is administered to a subject, the level can, if applicable, be measured in a different group of cells or in a tissue or an organ or in a body fluid such as blood or plasma. The level of inhibition is preferably measured in conditions that have been selected because they show the greatest effect of the nucleic acid on the target mRNA level in cells treated with the nucleic acid in vitro. The level of inhibition may for example be measured after 24 hours or 48 hours of treatment with a nucleic acid at a concentration of between 0.038 nM - 10 mM, preferably 1 nM, 10 nM or 100 nM. These conditions may be different for different nucleic acid sequences or for different types of nucleic acids, such as for nucleic acids that are unmodified or modified or conjugated to a ligand or not. Examples of suitable conditions for determining levels of inhibition are described in the examples.
By nucleic acid it is meant a nucleic acid comprising two strands comprising nucleotides, that is able to interfere with gene expression. Inhibition may be complete or partial and results in down regulation of gene expression in a targeted manner. The nucleic acid comprises two separate polynucleotide strands; the first strand, which may also be a guide strand; and a second strand, which may also be a passenger strand. The first strand and the second strand may be part of the same polynucleotide molecule that is self-complementary which 'folds' back to form a double-stranded molecule. The nucleic acid may be an siRNA molecule.
The nucleic acid may comprise ribonucleotides, modified ribonucleotides, deoxynucleotides, deoxyribonucleotides, or nucleotide analogues non-nucleotides that are able to mimic nucleotides such that they may 'pair' with the corresponding base on the target sequence or complementary strand. The nucleic acid may further comprise a double-stranded nucleic acid portion or duplex region formed by all or a portion of the first strand (also known in the art as a guide strand) and all or a portion of the second strand (also known in the art as a passenger strand). The duplex region is defined as beginning with the first base pair formed between the first strand and the second strand and ending with the last base pair formed between the first strand and the second strand, inclusive.
By duplex region it is meant the region in two complementary or substantially complementary oligonucleotides that form base pairs with one another, either by Watson-Crick base pairing or any other manner that allows for a duplex between oligonucleotide strands that are complementary or substantially complementary. For example, an oligonucleotide strand having 21 nucleotide units can base pair with another oligonucleotide of 21 nucleotide units, yet only 19 nucleotides on each strand are complementary or substantially complementary, such that the “duplex region” consists of 19 base pairs. The remaining base pairs may exist as 5' and 3' overhangs, or as single-stranded regions. Further, within the duplex region, 100% complementarity is not required; substantial complementarity is allowable within a duplex region. Substantial complementarity refers to complementarity between the strands such that they are capable of annealing under biological conditions. Techniques to empirically determine if two strands are capable of annealing under biological conditions are well known in the art. Alternatively, two strands can be synthesised and added together under biological conditions to determine if they anneal to one another. The portion of the first strand and second strand that forms at least one duplex region may be fully complementary and is at least partially complementary to each other. Depending on the length of a nucleic acid, a perfect match in terms of base complementarity between the first strand and the second strand is not necessarily required. However, the first and second strands must be able to hybridise under physiological conditions.
As used herein, the terms “non-pairing nucleotide analogue” means a nucleotide analogue which includes a non-base pairing moiety including but not limited to: 6 des amino adenosine (Nebularine), 4-Me-indole, 3-nitropyrrole, 5-nitroindole, Ds, Pa, N3-Me ribo U, N3-Me riboT, N3-Me dC, N3-Me-dT, N1-Me-dG, N1-Me-dA, N3-ethyl-dC, and N3-Me dC. In some embodiments the non-base pairing nucleotide analogue is a ribonucleotide. In other embodiments it is a deoxyribonucleotide.
As used herein, the term, “terminal functional group” includes without limitation a halogen, alcohol, amine, carboxylic, ester, amide, aldehyde, ketone, and ether groups. An “overhang” as used herein has its normal and customary meaning in the art, i.e. a single- stranded portion of a nucleic acid that extends beyond the terminal nucleotide of a complementary strand in a double-strand nucleic acid. The term “blunt end” includes double- stranded nucleic acid whereby both strands terminate at the same position, regardless of whether the terminal nucleotide(s) are base-paired. The terminal nucleotide of a first strand and a second strand at a blunt end may be base paired. The terminal nucleotide of a first strand and a second strand at a blunt end may not be paired. The terminal two nucleotides of a first strand and a second strand at a blunt end may be base-paired. The terminal two nucleotides of a first strand and a second strand at a blunt end may not be paired.
The terms “patient,” “subject,” and “individual” may be used interchangeably and refer to either a human or a non-human animal. These terms include mammals such as humans, primates, livestock animals (e.g., bovines, porcine), companion animals (e.g., canines, felines) and rodents (e.g., mice and rats).
As used herein, “treating” or “treatment” and grammatical variants thereof refer to an approach for obtaining beneficial or desired clinical results. The term may refer to slowing the onset or rate of development of a condition, disorder or disease, reducing or alleviating symptoms associated with it, generating a complete or partial regression of the condition, or some combination of any of the above. For the purposes of this invention, beneficial or desired clinical results include, but are not limited to, reduction or alleviation of symptoms, diminishment of extent of disease, stabilization (i.e., not worsening) of state of disease, delay or slowing of disease progression, amelioration or palliation of the disease state, and remission (whether partial or total), whether detectable or undetectable. "Treatment" can also mean prolonging survival relative to expected survival time if not receiving treatment. A subject (e.g., a human) in need of treatment may thus be a subject already afflicted with the disease or disorder in question. The term “treatment” includes inhibition or reduction of an increase in severity of a pathological state or symptoms relative to the absence of treatment, and is not necessarily meant to imply complete cessation of the relevant disease, disorder or condition.
As used herein, the terms "preventing" and grammatical variants thereof refer to an approach for preventing the development of, or altering the pathology of, a condition, disease or disorder. Accordingly, "prevention" may refer to prophylactic or preventive measures. For the purposes of this invention, beneficial or desired clinical results include, but are not limited to, prevention or slowing of symptoms, progression or development of a disease, whether detectable or undetectable. A subject (e.g., a human) in need of prevention may thus be a subject not yet afflicted with the disease or disorder in question. The term “prevention” includes slowing the onset of disease relative to the absence of treatment, and is not necessarily meant to imply permanent prevention of the relevant disease, disorder or condition. Thus “preventing” or “prevention” of a condition may in certain contexts refer to reducing the risk of developing the condition, or preventing or delaying the development of symptoms associated with the condition.
As used herein, an "effective amount," "therapeutically effective amount" or "effective dose" is an amount of a composition (e.g., a therapeutic composition or agent) that produces at least one desired therapeutic effect in a subject, such as preventing or treating a target condition or beneficially alleviating a symptom associated with the condition.
As used herein, the term “pharmaceutically acceptable salt” refers to a salt that is not harmful to a patient or subject to which the salt in question is administered. It may be a salt chosen, e.g., among acid addition salts and basic salts. Examples of acid addition salts include chloride salts, citrate salts and acetate salts. Examples of basic salts include salts wherein the cation is selected from alkali metal cations, such as sodium or potassium ions, alkaline earth metal cations, such as calcium or magnesium ions, as well as substituted ammonium ions, such as ions of the type N(R1)(R2)(R3)(R4)+, wherein R1, R2, R3 and R4 independently will typically designate hydrogen, optionally substituted C1 -6-alkyl groups or optionally substituted C2-6- alkenyl groups. Examples of relevant C1 -6-alkyl groups include methyl, ethyl, 1 -propyl and 2- propyl groups. Examples of C2-6-alkenyl groups of possible relevance include ethenyl, 1- propenyl and 2-propenyl. Other examples of pharmaceutically acceptable salts are described in “Remington’s Pharmaceutical Sciences”, 17th edition, Alfonso R. Gennaro (Ed.), Mark Publishing Company, Easton, PA, USA, 1985 (and more recent editions thereof), in the “Encyclopaedia of Pharmaceutical Technology”, 3rd edition, James Swarbrick (Ed.), Informa Healthcare USA (Inc.), NY, USA, 2007, and in J. Pharm. Sci. 66: 2 (1977). A "pharmaceutically acceptable salt" retains qualitatively a desired biological activity of the parent compound without imparting any undesired effects relative to the compound. Examples of pharmaceutically acceptable salts include acid addition salts and base addition salts. Acid addition salts include salts derived from nontoxic inorganic acids, such as hydrochloric, nitric, phosphorous, phosphoric, sulfuric, hydrobromic, hydroiodic and the like, or from nontoxic organic acids such as aliphatic mono- and di-carboxylic acids, phenyl-substituted alkanoic acids, hydroxy alkanoic acids, aromatic acids, aliphatic and aromatic sulfonic acids and the like. Base addition salts include salts derived from alkaline earth metals, such as sodium, potassium, magnesium, calcium and the like, as well as from nontoxic organic amines, such as N, N'-dibenzylethylenediamine, N-methylglucamine, chloroprocaine, choline, diethanolamine, ethylenediamine, procaine and the like. The term "pharmaceutically acceptable carrier" includes any of the standard pharmaceutical carriers. Pharmaceutically acceptable carriers for therapeutic use are well known in the pharmaceutical art, and are described, for example, in Remington's Pharmaceutical Sciences, Mack Publishing Co. (A. R. Gennaro edit. 1985). For example, sterile saline and phosphate- buffered saline at slightly acidic or physiological pH may be used. Exemplary pH buffering agents include phosphate, citrate, acetate, tris/hydroxymethyl)aminomethane (TRIS), N- Tris(hydroxymethyl)methyl-3-aminopropanesulphonic acid (TAPS), ammonium bicarbonate, diethanolamine, histidine, which is a preferred buffer, arginine, lysine, or acetate or mixtures thereof. The term further encompasses any agents listed in the US Pharmacopeia for use in animals, including humans. A "pharmaceutically acceptable carrier" includes any and all physiologically acceptable, i.e., compatible, solvents, dispersion media, coatings, antimicrobial agents, isotonic and absorption delaying agents, and the like. In certain embodiments, the carrier is suitable for intravenous, intramuscular, subcutaneous, parenteral, spinal or epidermal administration (e.g., by injection or infusion). Depending on selected route of administration, the nucleic acid may be coated in a material or materials intended to protect the compound from the action of acids and other natural inactivating conditions to which the nucleic acid may be exposed when administered to a subject by a particular route of administration.
The term “solvate” in the context of the present invention refers to a complex of defined stoichiometry formed between a solute (in casu, a nucleic acid compound or pharmaceutically acceptable salt thereof according to the invention) and a solvent. The solvent in this connection may, for example, be water or another pharmaceutically acceptable, typically small-molecular organic species, such as, but not limited to, acetic acid or lactic acid. When the solvent in question is water, such a solvate is normally referred to as a hydrate.
The invention will now be described with reference to the following non-limiting Figures and Examples.
Brief description of the Figures
Figure 1 shows a possible synthesis flow diagram of an exemplary conjugated nucleic acid, comprising a phosphorodithioate (PS2) -containing trivalent GalNAc ligand conjugate to an oligonucleotide via a phosphorodithioate (PS2) linkage.
Figure 2 shows the UV traces of AEX-HPLC analyses at 25°C of several nucleic acid strands. Fully stereodefined single stranded oligonucleotides ODN001 A and ODN005B result in narrow single peak signals (Figures 2A and 2B). Figure 3: mRNA levels of AT3 in murine primary hepatocytes after treatment with ODN001, ODN002, ODN003, ODN004, and ODN005 at various concentration (0.13 pM - 100 nM)
Figure 4: Serum stability gel 4 including ODN001 , ODN002, ODN003, and ODN004.
Figure 5: Serum stability gel 4 ODN005.
Figure 6: Tritosome stability gel 1 including ODN001 and ODN002
Figure 7: Tritosome stability gel 1 including ODN003, ODN004 and ODN005
Figure 8: AT3 mRNA levels after 43 days after injection
Figure 9: AT plasma levels over the course of the study (-7 to 43 days)
Examples
Example 1: siRNA syntheses
Example compounds were synthesised according to methods described below and methods known to the person skilled in the art. Assembly of the oligonucleotide chain and linker building blocks was performed by solid phase synthesis applying phosphoramidite methodology.
Building block synthesis
Synthesis of the phosphoramidite derivatives of ST41 (ST41-phos) as well as ST23 (ST23- phos) and their precursor compounds can be performed as described in WO2017/174657:
ST41-phos:
Figure imgf000072_0001
ST41-phos
ST23-phos:
Figure imgf000072_0002
ST23-phos Synthesis of thiophosphoramidite derivatives of ST41-(ps2) (ST41-S-phos) as well as ST23- (ps2) (ST23-S-phos) are described in Examples 2 and 3 below:
ST41-S-phos:
Figure imgf000073_0001
ST41-S-phos
ST23-S-phos:
Figure imgf000073_0002
Synthesis of Oligonucleotides All Oligonucleotides were synthesized on an AKTA oligopilot synthesizer using standard phosphoramidite chemistry. Commercially available solid support and 2’-OMe nucleotide phosphoramidites, 2’-F nucleotide phosphoramidites (all standard protection. ChemGenes. LinkTech) and thiophosphoramidites (Symeres) were used according to the manufacturers recommended procedures.
Ancillary reagents were purchased from EMP Biotech. Synthesis was performed using a 0.1 M solution of the phosphoramidite in dry acetonitrile and benzylthiotetrazole (BTT) was used as activator (0.3M in acetonitrile). Coupling time was 10 min. Thiophosphoramidites were coupled using a couple/wash/couple cycle over a period of 60 min. A Cap/OX/Cap or Cap/Thio/Cap cycle was applied (Cap: Ac20/NMI/Lutidine/Acetonitrile. Oxidizer: 0.1M I2 in pyridine/hhO). Phosphorothioates (PS) and phosphorodithioates (PS2) were introduced using 0.05M DDTT (Chemgenes. ((dimethylamino-methylidene) amino)-3H-1.2.4-dithiazoline-3-thione). All other reagents and solvents were commercially available and used in standard reagent quality. DMT cleavage was achieved by treatment with 3% dichloroacetic acid in toluene. Upon completion of the programmed synthesis cycles a diethylamine (DEA) wash was performed. All oligonucleotides were synthesized in DMT-off mode. All single stranded oligonucleotides were synthesized according to the reaction conditions described above. An exemplary synthesis flow diagram for a conjugated oligonucleotide with phosphorodithioate (PS2) linkages can be found in Figure 1.
The single strands were cleaved off the CPG by 40% aq. methylamine treatment. The resulting crude oligonucleotide was purified by ion exchange chromatography (SourceQ. 7.5 ml_. GE Healthcare) on an AKTA Pure HPLC System using a sodium bromide gradient. Product containing fractions were pooled, desalted on a size exclusion column (Zetadex. EMP Biotech) and lyophilised.
All final single-stranded products were analysed by AEX-HPLC to prove their purity. Purity is given in % FLP (% full length product) which is the percentage of the UV-area under the assigned product signal in the UV-trace of the AEX-HPLC analysis of the final product. Identity of the respective single stranded products (non-modified, amino-modified precursors or GalNAc conjugated oligonucleotides) was confirmed by LC-MS analysis.
Table 1: Single stranded oligonucleotides
Name MW. calc. MW (ESI-), found %FLP (AEX-HPLC)
ODN001A 6377.9 Da 6377.9 Da >99%
ODN001B 7716.4 Da 7716.0 Da 96.3%
ODN002B 7716.4 Da 7716.0 Da 96.2%
ODN003B 7780.4 Da 7780.9 Da 86.4%
ODN004B 7812.4 Da 7813.0 Da 85.6%
ODN005B 7812.4 Da 7812.8 Da 91.4%
Double-strand formation
Individual single strands were dissolved in a concentration of 60 OD/ml in H2O. Both individual oligonucleotide solutions were added together in a reaction vessel. A titration was performed for easier reaction monitoring. The first strand was added in 25% excess over the second strand as determined by UV-absorption at 260nm. The reaction mixture was heated to 80°C for 5 minutes and then slowly cooled to RT. Double-strand formation was monitored by ion pairing reverse phase HPLC. From the UV-area of the residual single-strand the needed amount of the second strand was calculated and added to the reaction mixture. The reaction was heated to 80°C again and slowly cooled to RT. This procedure was repeated until less than 10% of residual single strand was detected. Table 2: Nucleic acid conjugates siRNA % double strand
ODN001 97.4%
ODN002 96.6%
ODN003 94.0%
ODN004 92.4%
ODN005 97.8%
Example 2: Synthesis of ST41-S-phos
Under nitrogen atmosphere, 4-(3-(3-(bis(4-methoxyphenyl)(phenyl)methoxy)propoxy)-2,2- bis((3-(bis(4-methoxyphenyl)(phenyl)methoxy)propoxy)methyl)propoxy)butan-1-ol (20.4 g, 15.82 mmol) was dissolved in Dichloromethane (anhydrous) (120 ml) in a dried three neck flask and 3A molecular sieve was added. To this was added tri(pyrrolidin-1-yl)phosphane (3.82 ml, 16.6 mmol), followed by 0.45 M Tetrazole solution in acetonitrile (12.3 ml, 5.54 mmol) (seven additions of x 1.75 ml of a 0.45 M solution in acetonitrile at 2 min intervals). Next, n- (trimethylsilyl)imidazole (0.232 ml, 1.58 mmol) was added. After stirring for 5 min 0.45 M Tetrazole solution in acetonitrile (95 ml, 42.7 mmol) was added, immediately followed by addition of S-(2-mercaptoethyl) benzothioate (4.08 g, 20.6 mmol). After stirring for 5 min the reaction mixture was poured into dichloromethane (600 ml) containing triethylamine (30 ml). The mixture was immediately transferred into a separation funnel and washed with sat. NaHC03 (aq) (500 ml), 10% Na2C03 (aq) (2x 500 ml), brine 500 ml) and dried over Na2S04(s). After 20 min the Na2S04 was removed by filtration. Triethylamine (30 ml) was added and the mixture was concentrated under reduced pressure to obtain a colourless oil. Thin layer chromatography indicated complete consumption of the starting material. The crude product was divided over 4 batches and purified by flash column chromatography (injected as a solution in DCM + 1% Et3N, elution heptane (+1% Et3N), 10%-40% ethyl acetate (+ 1% Et3N)). Product containing fractions were combined, Et3N (5 ml) was added and concentrated under reduced pressure to obtain 14 g (36% yield) of ST41-S-phos. ESI(+)-MS, calculated for [M+Na]+ C9 H108NNaO15PS2 +: 1609.97 g/mol, found: 1609.2 g/mol. 1H-NMR (400MHz, DMSO- d6) d 7.85 (m. 2H), 7.64 (m, 1 H), 7.50 (m, 2H), 7.31 (m, 6H), 7.25-7.12 (m, 21H), 6.81 (m, 12H), 3.66 (m, 18H), 3.44 (m, 1H), 3.19 (m, 8H), 3.07-2.89 (m, 22H), 2.77 (m, 2H), 1.66 (m, 10H), 1.62-1.48 (m, 4H). Example 3: Synthesis of ST23-S-phos
Under nitrogen atmosphere, (2R,3R,4R,5R,6R)-5-acetamido-2-(acetoxymethyl)-6-(4- hydroxybutoxy)tetrahydro-2H-pyran-3,4-diyl diacetate (6 g, 14.31 mmol) was dissolved in Dichloromethane (anhydrous) (100 ml) in a dried three neck flask and 3A molecular sieve was added. To this was added tri(pyrrolidin-1-yl)phosphine (3.46 ml, 15.0 mmol), followed by 0.45 M Tetrazole solution in acetonitrile (11.1 ml, 5.01 mmol) (seven aliquots of x 1.59 ml of a 0.45 M solution in acetonitrile at 2 min intervals). Next, n-(trimethylsilyl)imidazole (0.210 ml, 1.43 mmol) was added. After stirring for 5 min 0.45 M Tetrazole solution in acetonitrile (86 ml, 38.6 mmol) was added, immediately followed by addition of S-(2-mercaptoethyl) benzothioate (3.69 g, 18.6 mmol). After stirring for 5 min the reaction mixture was poured into dichloromethane (600 ml) containing triethylamine (20 ml). The mixture was immediately transferred into a separation funnel and washed with sat. NaHCCh (aq) 400 ml), 10% Na2C03 (aq) (2x 400 ml), brine (400 ml) and dried over Na SC> (s). After 20 min the Na SC was removed by filtration. Triethylamine (20 ml) was added and the mixture was concentrated under reduced pressure to obtain a colourless oil. The residue was dissolved in toluene (60 ml_) and triethylamine (20 ml_) was added. The solution was slowly pipetted into 750 ml_ of vigorously stirred heptane giving a turbid solution and a sticky oil at the bottom of the flask. All the solvents were decanted, the sticky oil was washed with pentane (2x). The solvents were decanted again, re-dissolved in MeCN and finally concentrated under reduced pressure, co-evaporated with Et <D and dried overnight under reduced pressure to obtain 6 g (58% yield) of ST23-S-phos. ESI(-)-MS, calculated for [M+HCOO]- CsaHUe^O PS : 761.82 g/mol, found: 761.2 g/mol. 1H-NMR (400MHz, DMSO-d6) d 7.86 (m. 2H), 7.75 (m, 1 H), 7.63 (m,1 H), 7.50 (m, 2H), 5.14 (m, 1 H), 4.89 (m, 1H), 4.41 (m,. 1H), 3,95 (m, 4H), 3.80 (m, 1 H), 3.70-3.60 (m, 3H), 3.36 (m, 1 H), 3.18 (m, 2H), 3.10-3.01 (m, 4H), 2.75 (m, 2H), 2.02 (s, 3H), 1.92 (s, 3H), 1.79 (s, 3H), 1.69 (m, 7H), 1.50-1.39 (m, 4H).
Example 4: in vitro activity
In vitro study in primary mouse hepatocytes of knockdown efficacy of siRNA-GalNAc conjugates.
Levels of inhibition of AT3 mRNA in primary mouse hepatocytes after incubation with the GalNAc siRNA conjugates ODN001 to ODN005 at concentrations of 100 nM, to 0.0001 nM have been tested. To test the knock down efficacy of the GalNAc conjugated siRNAs on AT3 in primary hepatocytes, 20,000 mouse hepatocytes (Thermo Scientific: GIBCO Lot: #MC860) were seeded into collagen I coated 96 well plates (life technologies REF: A11428-28-03). siRNA conjugates were added at concentrations ranging from 100nM to 0.0001 nM. 24h post treatment, total RNA was isolated with InviTrap® RNA Cell HTS 96 Kit (Stratec REF: 7061300400) according to the manufacturer’s manual. Expression levels of AT3 were quantified by AACt analysis, using Multiplex TaqMan quantification against house-keeping gene expression (ApoB and ActB).
Results of this experiment are shown in Figure 3.
Example 5: in vitro stability
In vitro stability study of siRNA-GalNAc conjugates.
The stability of siRNA conjugates ODN001 to ODN005 in tritosome extracts has been assessed.
For each conjugated siRNA, 5 mM of the conjugated siRNA were incubated either with serum or acidic rat liver tritosomes extract (pH 5) at 37°C for 0, 24, and 96 hours. For the incubation over 96 hours, fresh acidified rat liver tritosome extracts were added every 24h. After incubating the siRNAs for respective times, samples were snap frozen and stored until purification at -80°C. RNA was purified using a Clarity OTX Starter Kit (Phenomenex CatNo:KSO-8494) according to the manufactures protocol, and was subsequently dried in a SpeedVac and reconstituted in 30 mI H2O. 9 mI were subjected to separation on 20% TBE polyacrylamide gel and visualised by ethidium bromide staining.
In addition, samples from Oh and 24h time points were analysed by HPLC-MS as reported in Weingartner et al. Molecular Therapy - Nucleic Acids 2020.
All variants of PS2 stabilizations at various positions did not show significant band shifts, or reduced intensities respectively when incubated in serum suggesting stability in serum (Figures 4 and 5). Thus, this suggests stable molecules beyond the time circulating in blood. However, all tested molecules showed a small band shift when incubated in tritosomes for more than 24 hours suggesting the loss of the GalNAc sugars off the linker (Figures 6 and 7). Moreover, compared to ODN001, ODN002, and ODN004 that did not show further significant band shifts, or reduced intensities respectively. Intriguingly, the bands for ODN003 and ODN005 at 96 hours almost completely disappeared suggesting a decomposition of the compound in acidic tritosomes after 4 days. For molecules ODN001, ODN002, and ODN004, stability in tritosomes was seen for more than 4 days.
Example 6: in vivo activity
In vivo study in male C57BL/6N mice to determine knockdown efficacy of siRNA GalNAc conjugates.
C57BL/6 male mice (n = 4 per group) were administered subcutaneously with 0.3 mg/kg GalNAc-siRNAs ODN001 to ODN005 targeting AT3 (see Table ). As shown in Table 6 EDTA- plasma samples were retrieved by retro orbital bleeding at 7 days before treatment for baseline, day 1, 8, 15, 29, and 43 post treatment. At day 43 post treatment, the mice were sacrificed, and liver and kidneys were harvested. Plasma AT3 concentrations were analyzed with an Antithrombin III (SERPINC1) Mouse ELISA Kit (abeam ab108800). Liver AT3 mRNA levels were quantified by AACt analysis by Multiplex TaqMan quantification against house keeping gene expression (ApoB and actin).
Table 6:
Figure imgf000078_0001
On the level of mRNA downregulation (Figure 8), ODN001 and ODN004 showed the lowest transcript levels 6 weeks after injection (around 80% of PBS treated mice). ODN002 and ODN005 demonstrated the second best remaining knockdown of AT3 mRNA (around 90% of PBS treated mice). When treated with ODN003, mRNA levels were at the level of PBS treated animals suggesting that the siRNA mediated knockdown has come to an end.
AT3 serum levels correlate with liver mRNA levels, providing an indirect readout without a need of liver biopsies (Sehgal et al., 2015) allowing a monitoring of the siRNA mediated knockdown over time. As baseline levels, plasma samples from 7 days before injection were used for normalization.
All molecules demonstrated their lowest AT3 levels on day 8 after injection, with ODN001 having the lowest (41 ±5.7%) and ODN003 the highest plasma levels (85±6.0%) (Figure 9). After day 8, AT plasma levels started to recover. AT levels in ODN003 treated mice reached baseline at day 15, whereas in ODN005 treated mice, AT levels reached baseline at day 43. ODN002 and ODN004 treated animals ended the study at 85±5.5% and 88±3.8%, and ODN001 at 74±10.3%, suggesting a longer duration of action.
Example 7 - HPLC analysis of nucleic acids
HPLC analysis of nucleic acid strands with or without uncontrolled stereocentres.
Naturally occurring DNA and RNA molecules do not have any undefined stereocentres and are therefore stereopure, even when many copies of a same molecule are present in a composition. However, such molecules often cannot be used as therapeutic agents because they are prone to degradation in the environments in which they are to be used (e.g., in blood). Chemical modifications are therefore used to protect therapeutic nucleic acids from enzymatic degradation and allow their use as therapeutic agents. One commonly used modification is the substitution of naturally occurring phosphodiester (PO) linkages to phosphorothioate (PS) linkages. This is most easily done in nucleic acid solid phase synthesis, by use of a sulfurization reagent during the P(lll) -> P(V) oxidation cycle. This however leads to the introduction of an uncontrolled stereocentre and two diastereomers are formed for each phosphorothioate (PS) modification present in the nucleic acid. A composition comprising many copies of a single nucleic acid comprising a number (n) of phosphorothioate (PS) modifications that are not stereodefined will in fact comprise 2n diastereomers of the nucleic acid. Diastereomers differ in chemical and physical properties. Thus, they often have different retention times during purification and analysis by HPLC. This is especially the case for preparative HPLC purification conditions of nucleic acids for medical use, as they should be performed at room temperature in mild conditions. Anion exchange chromatography is best suited for such a process, as aqueous buffers with a Na+-gradient with a low content of organic cosolvent can be used. Under these conditions, the complex mixture of diastereomeric mixtures can have an extreme impact on the peak shape and peak multiplicity. As most of the unwanted impurities share the same undefined stereocentres, they are also present in sets of diastereomers. Thus, separational power of the purification method can be strongly impaired.
In this example, a common analytical anion exchange HPLC method was run at 25°C, as would be done in a normal purification run. The following conditions were used to obtain the UV traces. Column: DNAPac PA200 4x250 mm, DNAPac PA200 Guard 4x50 mm; Buffer A: 20 mM, Tris pH 7.4 in H20 + 10 % ACN (v+v); Buffer B: 20 mM Tris pH 7.4, 400 mM LiCICU in H2O + 10 % ACN (v+v); Flow: 1.0 mL/min; Temperature: 25 °C; gradient: 25 %B to 70 %B in 10 min. The UV traces for a number of nucleic acids obtained with the above method are shown in Figure 2. The nucleic acids for which the UV traces are shown are the following:
Figures 2A and 2B: ODN001A is the fully stereodefined antisense strand of siRNAs ODN001- ODN005. ODN005B is the fully stereodefined conjugated sense strand of siRNA ODN005. Metabolic stabilisation of both of these strands is increased through the use of phosphorodithioate (PS2) internucleotide linkages in both strands, as well as in the triantennary GalNAc ligand and between the ligand and the nucleic acid for the sense strand. The major product for both of these strands is stereopure, as all their stereocentres are stereodefined. Accordingly, both compounds form a narrow single peak in the HPLC analysis. This would likely lead to enhanced resolution power in a large scale preparative HPLC purification.
Summary tables
Summary duplex table - Table 3
Figure imgf000080_0001
Summary abbreviations table - Table 4
Figure imgf000080_0002
Figure imgf000081_0001
Figure imgf000082_0001
Figure imgf000083_0001
The abbreviations as shown in the above abbreviation table may be used herein. The list of abbreviations may not be exhaustive and further abbreviations and their meaning may be found throughout this document.
82 ummary sequence table - Table 5
Figure imgf000084_0001

Claims

Claims
1. A conjugated nucleic acid for inhibiting expression of a target gene, wherein the nucleic acid is conjugated to a ligand, wherein:
(i) the ligand comprises a phosphorodithioate (PS2); and/or
(ii) the nucleic acid is conjugated to the ligand via a phosphorodithioate (PS2) linkage.
2. The conjugated nucleic acid of claim 1, wherein the ligand is free of phosphorothioates (PS).
3. The conjugated nucleic acid of any preceding claim, wherein the nucleic acid comprises at least one strand, wherein said strand is conjugated to the ligand and is free of phosphorothioates (PS).
4. The conjugated nucleic acid of any preceding claim, wherein the ligand comprises at least one saccharide.
5. The conjugated nucleic acid of any preceding claim, wherein the ligand comprises at least one saccharide selected from N-acetyl galactosamine (GalNAc), mannose, galactose, glucose, glucosamine and fucose.
6. The conjugated nucleic acid of any preceding claim, wherein the ligand comprises at least one N-acetyl galactosamine (GalNAc).
7. The conjugated nucleic acid of any preceding claim, wherein the ligand comprises:
(i) at least one N-acetyl galactosamine (GalNAc); and
(ii) a linker, wherein the linker conjugates the at least one N-acetyl galactosamine (GalNAc) to the nucleic acid.
8. The conjugated nucleic acid of any preceding claim, wherein the ligand is a compound of formula (II):
[S-X1-P-X2]3-A-X3- (II) wherein:
S represents a saccharide, preferably wherein the saccharide is N-acetyl galactosamine (GalNAc);
X1 represents C3-C6 alkylene or (-CH2-CH2-0)m(-CH2)2- wherein m is 1, 2, or 3; P is independently in each instance a phosphodiester (PO) or a modified phosphate;
X2 is a Ci-Cs alkylene or an alkylene ether of the formula (-CH2)n-0-CH2- where n = 1-6;
A is a branching unit;
X3 represents a bridging unit; wherein X3 is conjugated to the nucleic acid via a phosphodiester (PO) or a modified phosphate.
9. The conjugated nucleic acid of claim 8, wherein:
(i) each P is independently a phosphodiester (PO) or a phosphorodithioate (PS2); and/or
(ii) at least one P is a phosphorodithioate (PS2).
10. The conjugated nucleic acid of claims 8 and 9, wherein X3 is conjugated to the nucleic acid via a phosphorodithioate (PS2).
11. The conjugated nucleic acid of any of claims 8-10, wherein the saccharide S is N-acetyl galactosamine (GalNAc).
12. The conjugated nucleic acid of any of the preceding claims, wherein the ligand, including the linkage to the nucleic acid, is selected from:
Figure imgf000086_0001
Figure imgf000087_0001
Figure imgf000088_0001
13. The conjugated nucleic acid of any preceding claim, wherein the nucleic acid comprises a phosphorodithioate (PS2) internucleotide linkage.
14. The conjugated nucleic acid of any preceding claim, wherein the nucleic acid is capable of mediating RNA interference.
15. The conjugated nucleic acid of any preceding claim, wherein the nucleic acid is a siRNA.
16. The conjugated nucleic acid of any preceding claim, wherein the nucleic acid comprises a first strand and a second strand.
17. The conjugated nucleic acid of claim 16, wherein the first strand of the nucleic acid is at least partially complementary to a target sequence, and wherein the first strand and the second strand are at least partially complementary to each other.
18. The conjugated nucleic acid of claim 17, wherein the ligand is conjugated to the second strand.
19. The conjugated nucleic acid of claims 16-18, wherein the first strand and/or the second strand is/are free of phosphorothioates (PS).
20. The conjugated nucleic acid of claims 16-19, wherein the first strand and the second strand form a duplex region of 17-25 nucleotides in length.
21. The conjugated nucleic acid of claims 16-20, wherein at least one nucleotide of the first and/or of the second strand is a modified nucleotide, preferably a non-naturally occurring nucleotide such as a 2’-F modified nucleotide.
22. The conjugated nucleic acid of claims 16-21, wherein at least nucleotides 2 and 14 of the first strand are modified by a first modification, the nucleotides being numbered consecutively starting with nucleotide number 1 at the 5’ end of the first strand.
23. The conjugated nucleic acid of claims 16-22, wherein the first strand has a terminal 5’ (E)-vinylphosphonate nucleotide at its 5’ end.
24. The conjugated nucleic acid of claims 16-23, wherein the first strand and/or the second strand of the nucleic acid comprises a phosphorodithioate (PS2) internucleotide linkage.
25. The conjugated nucleic acid of claims 16-24, wherein the nucleic acid comprises a phosphorodithioate (PS2) linkage between each of the two, three or four terminal nucleotides at the 3’ end of the first strand and/or a phosphorodithioate (PS2) linkage between each of the two, three or four terminal nucleotides at the 3’ end of the second strand and/or a phosphorodithioate (PS2) linkage between each of the two, three or four terminal nucleotides at the 5’ end of the second strand, and wherein the nucleic acid comprises a linkage other than a phosphorodithioate (PS2) linkage between the two, three orfour terminal nucleotides at the 5’ end of the first strand.
26. The conjugated nucleic acid of any preceding claim, wherein the entire nucleic acid, including any hybridised strand and conjugated ligand, is free of phosphorothioates (PS).
27. The conjugated nucleic acid of any preceding claim, wherein: (i) all internucleotide linkages in the nucleic acid are phosphodiesters (PO) or phosphorodithioates (PS2);
(ii) all phosphate bonds in the ligand are phosphodiesters (PO) or phosphorodithioates (PS2);
(iii) all internucleotide linkages in the nucleic acid and all phosphate bonds in the ligand are phosphodiesters (PO) or phosphorodithioates (PS2); or
(iv) the nucleic acid is a siRNA and all internucleotide linkages in the siRNA are phosphodiesters (PO) or phosphorodithioates (PS2).
28. A composition comprising a plurality of conjugated nucleic acids of any preceding claims, wherein:
(i) the composition is, or is essentially, stereopure;
(ii) all stereocentres of all, or of essentially all, of the ligands of said plurality of conjugated nucleic acids have the same stereochemical conformation;
(iii) all stereocentres of all, or of essentially all, of the nucleic acids of said plurality of conjugated nucleic acids have the same stereochemical conformation; and/or
(iv) all stereocentres of all, or of essentially all, of said plurality of conjugated nucleic acids have the same stereochemical conformation.
29. A composition comprising a conjugated nucleic acid of any of claims 1-27 and a solvent and/or a delivery vehicle and/or a physiologically acceptable excipient and/or a carrier and/or a salt and/or a diluent and/or a buffer and/or a preservative and/or a further therapeutic agent selected from the group comprising an oligonucleotide, a small molecule, a monoclonal antibody, a polyclonal antibody and a peptide.
30. A conjugated nucleic acid of any of claims 1-27 or a composition of claims 28 and 29 for use as a medicament.
31. A conjugated nucleic acid of any of claims 1-27 or a composition of claims 28 and 29 for use in the prevention, decrease of the risk of suffering from, or treatment of a disease that can be treated by decreasing the expression of the gene targeted by the nucleic acid.
32. Use of a conjugated nucleic acid of any of claims 1-27 or a composition of claims 28 and 29 in the prevention, decrease of the risk of suffering from, or treatment of a disease that can be treated by decreasing the expression of the gene targeted by the nucleic acid.
33. A method of preventing, decreasing the risk of suffering from, or treating a disease, comprising administering a pharmaceutically effective amount of a conjugated nucleic acid of any of claims 1-27 or a composition of claims 28 and 29 to an individual in need of treatment.
PCT/EP2022/055455 2021-03-03 2022-03-03 Conjugated nucleic acids comprising a phosphorodithioate for inhibiting gene expression in a cell WO2022184852A1 (en)

Applications Claiming Priority (2)

Application Number Priority Date Filing Date Title
EP21160498.8 2021-03-03
EP21160498 2021-03-03

Publications (1)

Publication Number Publication Date
WO2022184852A1 true WO2022184852A1 (en) 2022-09-09

Family

ID=74856787

Family Applications (1)

Application Number Title Priority Date Filing Date
PCT/EP2022/055455 WO2022184852A1 (en) 2021-03-03 2022-03-03 Conjugated nucleic acids comprising a phosphorodithioate for inhibiting gene expression in a cell

Country Status (1)

Country Link
WO (1) WO2022184852A1 (en)

Citations (7)

* Cited by examiner, † Cited by third party
Publication number Priority date Publication date Assignee Title
US5885968A (en) 1992-08-11 1999-03-23 Rijksuniversiteit Te Leiden Triantennary cluster glycosides, their preparation and use
WO2015175510A1 (en) * 2014-05-12 2015-11-19 Alnylam Pharmaceuticals, Inc. Methods and compositions for treating a serpinc1-associated disorder
WO2017174657A1 (en) 2016-04-05 2017-10-12 Silence Therapeutics Gmbh Nucleic acid linked to a trivalent glycoconjugate
WO2018185241A1 (en) * 2017-04-05 2018-10-11 Silence Therapeutics Gmbh Products and compositions
WO2019092280A1 (en) * 2017-11-13 2019-05-16 Silence Therapeutics Gmbh Nucleic acids for inhibiting expression of a target gene comprising phosphorodithioate linkages
WO2020104669A1 (en) * 2018-11-23 2020-05-28 Silence Therapeutics Gmbh Nucleic acids for inhibiting expression of c3 in a cell
WO2021178885A1 (en) * 2020-03-06 2021-09-10 Aligos Therapeutics, Inc. Modified short interfering nucleic acid (sina) molecules and uses thereof

Patent Citations (7)

* Cited by examiner, † Cited by third party
Publication number Priority date Publication date Assignee Title
US5885968A (en) 1992-08-11 1999-03-23 Rijksuniversiteit Te Leiden Triantennary cluster glycosides, their preparation and use
WO2015175510A1 (en) * 2014-05-12 2015-11-19 Alnylam Pharmaceuticals, Inc. Methods and compositions for treating a serpinc1-associated disorder
WO2017174657A1 (en) 2016-04-05 2017-10-12 Silence Therapeutics Gmbh Nucleic acid linked to a trivalent glycoconjugate
WO2018185241A1 (en) * 2017-04-05 2018-10-11 Silence Therapeutics Gmbh Products and compositions
WO2019092280A1 (en) * 2017-11-13 2019-05-16 Silence Therapeutics Gmbh Nucleic acids for inhibiting expression of a target gene comprising phosphorodithioate linkages
WO2020104669A1 (en) * 2018-11-23 2020-05-28 Silence Therapeutics Gmbh Nucleic acids for inhibiting expression of c3 in a cell
WO2021178885A1 (en) * 2020-03-06 2021-09-10 Aligos Therapeutics, Inc. Modified short interfering nucleic acid (sina) molecules and uses thereof

Non-Patent Citations (11)

* Cited by examiner, † Cited by third party
Title
"Encyclopaedia of Pharmaceutical Technology", 2007, INFORMA HEALTHCARE USA (INC.
"Remington: The Science and Practice of Pharmacy", 2005, LIPPINCOTT WILLIAMS & WILKINS
"Remington's Pharmaceutical Sciences", 1985, MARK PUBLISHING COMPANY
"Sustained and Controlled Release Drug Delivery Systems", 1978, MARCEL DEKKER, INC.
AKINC ET AL., MOL THER, vol. 18, no. 7, July 2010 (2010-07-01), pages 1357 - 64
BIESSEN EA ET AL., J MED CHEM., vol. 38, no. 9, 28 April 1995 (1995-04-28), pages 1538 - 46
DUBBER, BIOCONJUG. CHEM., vol. 14, no. 1, January 2003 (2003-01-01), pages 239 - 46
ISHIBASHI,S., J BIOL. CHEM., vol. 269, no. 45, 11 November 1994 (1994-11-11), pages 27803 - 6
J. PHARM. SCI., vol. 66, 1977, pages 2
WEIGEL, P.H., BIOCHIM. BIOPHYS. ACTA., vol. 1572, no. 2-3, 19 September 2002 (2002-09-19), pages 341 - 63
WEINGARTNER ET AL., MOLECULAR THERAPY - NUCLEIC ACIDS, 2020

Similar Documents

Publication Publication Date Title
US11560563B2 (en) SiRNAs with vinylphosphonate at the 5′ end of the antisense strand
US20220290143A1 (en) Products and compositions
US11873489B2 (en) Nucleic acids for inhibiting expression of a target gene comprising phosphorodithioate linkages
US20220017899A1 (en) Nucleic acids for inhibiting expression of c3 in a cell
AU2019247637A1 (en) siRNAs with vinylphosphonate at the 5&#39; end of the antisense strand
EP3550021A1 (en) Products and compositions for inhibiting expression of a target gene
US20230272385A1 (en) siRNAs WITH VINYLPHOSPHONATE AT THE 5&#39; END OF THE ANTISENSE STRAND
US11753642B2 (en) Nucleic acids for inhibiting expression of C3 in a cell
WO2022223557A1 (en) Nucleic acids for inhibiting expression of xdh in a cell
WO2018185252A1 (en) Nucleic acid conjugates
WO2022184852A1 (en) Conjugated nucleic acids comprising a phosphorodithioate for inhibiting gene expression in a cell
RU2812806C2 (en) Nucleic acids for inhibition of target gene expression containing phosphodithioate bonds
EP3550022A1 (en) Products and compositions
CA3230589A1 (en) Nucleic acids for inhibiting expression of complement factor b (cfb) in a cell
EP3730617A1 (en) Nucleic acids for inhibiting expression of c3 in a cell
CA3216859A1 (en) Sirna targeting tmprss6 for the treatment of myeloproliferative disorders
WO2023152286A1 (en) Nucleic acids for inhibiting expression of masp-2 in a cell
KR20240051221A (en) Nucleic acids for inhibiting expression of complement factor B (CFB) in cells
WO2024013334A1 (en) Nucleic acids for inhibiting expression of agt in a cell
EA045986B1 (en) NUCLEIC ACIDS FOR INHIBITION OF LPA EXPRESSION IN THE CELL

Legal Events

Date Code Title Description
121 Ep: the epo has been informed by wipo that ep was designated in this application

Ref document number: 22711001

Country of ref document: EP

Kind code of ref document: A1

NENP Non-entry into the national phase

Ref country code: DE

122 Ep: pct application non-entry in european phase

Ref document number: 22711001

Country of ref document: EP

Kind code of ref document: A1